Lenovo Server 6522 User Manual

Installation and User Guide  
ThinkServer TS200  
Machine Types: 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525,  
6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530  
Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in Appendix B, “Notices,” on page 183  
and the Warranty and Support Information document on the Lenovo® ThinkServer Documentation DVD.  
First Edition (November 2009)  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009.  
Portions © Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2009.  
LENOVO products, data, computer software, and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and  
are sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C.F.R. 2.101 with limited and restricted rights  
to use, reproduction and disclosure.  
LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If products, data, computer software, or services are delivered  
pursuant a General Services Administration GSAcontract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions  
set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
Before installing this product, read the Safety Information.  
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações de Segurança.  
Pred instalací tohoto produktu si prectete prírucku bezpecnostních instrukcí.  
Læs sikkerhedsforskrifterne, før du installerer dette produkt.  
Lees voordat u dit product installeert eerst de veiligheidsvoorschriften.  
Ennen kuin asennat tämän tuotteen, lue turvaohjeet kohdasta Safety Information.  
Avant d’installer ce produit, lisez les consignes de sécurité.  
Vor der Installation dieses Produkts die Sicherheitshinweise lesen.  
Prima di installare questo prodotto, leggere le Informazioni sulla Sicurezza.  
Les sikkerhetsinformasjonen (Safety Information) før du installerer dette produktet.  
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações sobre Segurança.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Antes de instalar este producto, lea la información de seguridad.  
Läs säkerhetsinformationen innan du installerar den här produkten.  
Important:  
Each caution and danger statement in this document is labeled with a number. This  
number is used to cross reference an English-language caution or danger  
statement with translated versions of the caution or danger statement in the Safety  
Information book.  
For example, if a caution statement is labeled Statement 1,translations for that  
caution statement are in the Safety Information book under Statement 1.″  
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this document before you  
perform the procedures. Read any additional safety information that comes with the  
server or optional device before you install the device.  
viii ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 1:  
DANGER  
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is  
hazardous.  
To avoid a shock hazard:  
v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,  
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical  
storm.  
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical  
outlet.  
v Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to  
this product.  
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal  
cables.  
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or  
structural damage.  
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems,  
networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless  
instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.  
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when  
installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached  
devices.  
To Connect:  
To Disconnect:  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
2. First, attach all cables to devices.  
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.  
4. Attach power cords to outlet.  
5. Turn device ON.  
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.  
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.  
4. Remove all cables from devices.  
Safety ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 2:  
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only Part Number 33F8354 or an  
equivalent type battery. If your system has a module containing a lithium  
battery, replace it only with the same module type made by the same  
manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly  
used, handled, or disposed of.  
Do not:  
v Throw or immerse into water  
v Heat to more than 100° C (212° F)  
v Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
x
ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 3:  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or  
transmitters) are installed, note the following:  
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could  
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable  
parts inside the device.  
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than  
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser  
diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly  
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Laser Klasse 1  
Laser Klass 1  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
`
Appareil A Laser de Classe 1  
Safety xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 4:  
18 kg (39.7 lb.)  
32 kg (70.5 lb.)  
55 kg (121.2 lb.)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe practices when lifting.  
Statement 5:  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power  
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device  
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current  
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power  
source.  
2
1
xii ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 8:  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following  
label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any  
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside  
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact  
a service technician.  
Statement 11:  
CAUTION:  
The following label indicates sharp edges, corners, or joints nearby.  
Statement 12:  
CAUTION:  
The following label indicates a hot surface nearby.  
Statement 13:  
Safety xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DANGER  
Overloading a branch circuit is potentially a fire hazard and a shock hazard  
under certain conditions. To avoid these hazards, ensure that your system  
electrical requirements do not exceed branch circuit protection  
requirements. Refer to the information that is provided with your device for  
electrical specifications.  
Statement 15:  
CAUTION:  
Make sure that the rack is secured properly to avoid tipping when the server  
unit is extended.  
Statement 17:  
CAUTION:  
The following label indicates moving parts nearby.  
Statement 26:  
CAUTION:  
Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted devices.  
Attention: This product is suitable for use on an IT power distribution system  
whose maximum phase to phase voltage is 240 V under any distribution fault  
condition.  
xiv ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1. Introduction  
This Installation and User Guide is intended to use with your Lenovo® ThinkServer™  
TS200 (Machine Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530)  
server. This document contains information about:  
v Setting up and cabling the server  
v Starting and configuring the server  
v Installing options and replacing customer replaceable units (CRUs)  
v Solving problems  
The server comes with the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD to help you configure the  
hardware, install device drivers, and install the operating system.  
The server comes with a limited warranty. For information about the terms of the  
warranty and getting service and assistance, see the Warranty and Support  
Information document on the ThinkServer Documentation DVD. To obtain up-to-date  
information about the server and other Lenovo products, go to:  
Record information about the server in the following table. You will need this  
information when you register the server with Lenovo.  
Product name  
Machine type  
Model number  
Serial number  
ThinkServer TS200  
6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530  
_____________________________________________  
_____________________________________________  
The model number and serial number are on labels on the bottom of the server and  
on the front, visible through the bezel, as shown in the following illustration.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
Model and machine type  
For a list of supported optional devices for the server, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver and click the Options tab.  
Notices and statements in this document  
The caution and danger statements that appear in this document are also in the  
multilingual Safety Information document, which is on the Lenovo ThinkServer  
Documentation DVD. Each statement is numbered for reference to the  
corresponding statement in the Safety Information document.  
The following notices and statements are used in this document:  
v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.  
v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you avoid  
inconvenient or problem situations.  
v Attention: These notices indicate potential damage to programs, devices, or  
data. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which  
damage could occur.  
v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous  
to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially  
hazardous procedure step or situation.  
v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or  
extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the  
description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or  
situation.  
2
ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Related documentation  
The Lenovo ThinkServer Documentation DVD contains documentation for the  
server in Portable Document Format (PDF). The Lenovo ThinkServer  
Documentation DVD requires the Adobe® Reader 5.0 (or later) or xpdf, which  
comes with Linux® operating systems.  
The following table describes the content and location of documentation that is  
provided with your server.  
Document  
Description  
Location  
Read Me First  
This document directs you to the  
ThinkServer Documentation DVD for  
printed, provided  
in server  
complete warranty and support information. packaging  
Important Notices  
This document includes safety and legal  
notices that you are expected to read  
before using the server.  
printed, provided  
in server  
packaging  
Hardware Maintenance  
Manual  
This document provides diagnostic  
information, parts listing, and replacement Web site:  
Lenovo Support  
procedures for all field replaceable units  
(parts replaced by trained service  
personnel) as well as all customer  
replaceable units (CRUs).  
Warranty and Support  
Information  
This document includes the warranty  
statement and information about how to  
contact Lenovo Support.  
Available on the  
ThinkServer  
Documentation  
DVD  
Safety Information  
This document includes translations of all  
of the safety statements used in the  
ThinkServer documentation.  
Available on the  
ThinkServer  
Documentation  
DVD  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. Server setup roadmap  
The installation process varies depending on the configuration of the server when it  
was delivered. In some cases, the server is fully configured and just needs to be  
connected to power and the network and started. In other cases, the server needs  
to have hardware features installed, requires hardware and firmware configuration,  
and requires the operating system to be installed.  
Table 1. Server setup roadmap  
Task  
Where to find information  
Unpack  
Install hardware  
features  
Connect Ethernet cable “Rear view” on page 18  
and power cords to  
network and power  
connectors  
Start the server to  
verify operation  
Review UEFI settings  
and customize as  
needed  
Configure RAID  
controllers and arrays  
Check for firmware  
updates  
and basic drivers  
Install any additional  
drivers needed for  
added features  
Refer to the instructions that came with the hardware option.  
Configure Ethernet  
settings in operating  
system  
See the operating system help. This step is not required if the  
operating system was installed using the ThinkServer EasyStartup  
program.  
Test Integrated  
Management Module  
(requires the IMM  
Premium option)  
Install remote  
management  
applications  
Install applications  
Refer to the documentation that accompanies the applications that  
you want to install.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3. What is included with your server  
The TS200 server package includes the server, power cords, the ThinkServer  
Documentation DVD, and software media.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Server  
Power cords  
Documentation and software media  
Features and technologies  
The TS200 server offers the following features and technologies:  
v UEFI-compliant server firmware  
The server firmware offers several features, including Unified Extensible  
Firmware Interface (UEFI) 2.1 compliance, enhanced RAS capabilities, and BIOS  
compatibility support. UEFI replaces the basic input/output system (BIOS) and  
defines a standard interface between the operating system, platform firmware,  
and external devices. UEFI-compliant servers are capable of starting  
UEFI-compliant operating systems, BIOS-based operating systems, and  
BIOS-based adapters as well as UEFI-compliant adapters.  
Note: The server does not support DOS (Disk Operating System).  
v Systems-management capabilities  
The integrated management module (IMM) combines service processor  
functions, video controller, and remote presence function in a single chip. The  
IMM provides advanced service-processor control, monitoring, and alerting  
function. If an environmental condition exceeds a threshold or if a system  
component fails, the IMM lights LEDs to help you diagnose the problem, records  
the error in the event log, and alerts you to the problem. The IMM also provides  
a virtual presence capability for remote server management capabilities. The IMM  
provides remote server management through industry-standard interfaces:  
– Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) version 2.0  
– Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 3  
– Common Information Model (CIM)  
– Web browser  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Remote presence capability and blue-screen capture  
The remote presence feature provides the following functions:  
– Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1600 x 1200 at 85 Hz,  
regardless of the system state  
– Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote  
client  
– Mapping the CD or DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a  
remote client, and mapping ISO and diskette image files as virtual drives that  
are available for use by the server  
– Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server  
as a virtual drive  
The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the  
IMM restarts the server when the IMM detects an operating-system hang  
condition. A system administrator can use the blue-screen capture to assist in  
determining the cause of the hang condition.  
v Preboot diagnostics programs  
The preboot diagnostics programs are stored on the integrated USB memory. It  
collects and analyzes system information to aid in diagnosing server problems.  
The diagnostics programs collect the following information about the server:  
– System configuration  
– Network interfaces and settings  
– Installed hardware  
– Service processor status and configuration  
– Vital product data, firmware, and UEFI (formerly BIOS) configuration  
– Hard disk drive health  
– RAID controller configuration  
– Event logs for service processors  
The diagnostic programs create a merged log that includes events from all  
collected logs. The information is collected into a file that you can send to  
Lenovo service and support. Additionally, you can view the information locally  
through a generated text report file. You can also copy the log to a removable  
media and view the log from a Web browser.  
For additional information about preboot diagnostics, see the Hardware  
Maintenance Manual.  
v EasyStartup DVD  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program guides you through the configuration of  
the hardware, the RAID controller, and the installation of the operating system  
and device drivers.  
v EasyManage DVD  
The ThinkServer EasyManage program helps you manage and administer your  
servers and clients through remote problem notification as well as monitoring and  
alerting.  
v Integrated network support  
The server comes with an integrated dual-port Intel 82574L Gigabit Ethernet  
controller, which supports connection to a 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1000 Mbps  
network. For more information, see “Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller”  
v Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) 2.0  
8
ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The command-line interface provides direct access to server management  
functions through the IPMI 2.0 protocol. Use the command-line interface to issue  
commands to control the server power, view system information, and identify the  
server. You can also save one or more commands as a text file and run the file  
as a script.  
v Large data-storage capacity and hot-swap capability  
Some hot-swap server models support four 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives.  
With the hot-swap feature, you can add, remove, or replace hard disk drives  
without turning off the server.  
v Large system-memory capacity  
The server supports up to 32 GB of system memory when registered DIMMs are  
installed. The server supports up to 16 GB of memory when unbuffered DIMMs  
are installed. The memory controller supports error correcting code (ECC) and  
non-error correcting code for up to 6 industry-standard PC3-8500, or  
PC3-10600R-999 (single-rank or dual-rank), 1066 and 1333 MHz, DDR3  
(third-generation double-data-rate), registered, and unbuffered synchronous  
dynamic random access memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory modules  
(DIMMs).  
v Redundant connection  
The addition of an optional network interface card (NIC) provides a failover  
capability to a redundant Ethernet connection. If a problem occurs with the  
primary Ethernet connection, all Ethernet traffic that is associated with the  
primary connection is automatically switched to the redundant NIC. If the  
applicable device drivers are installed, this switching occurs without data loss and  
without user intervention.  
v High-performance graphics controller  
The server comes with an onboard high-performance graphics controller that  
supports high resolutions and includes many performance-enhancing features for  
the operating-system environment.  
v Redundant connection  
The addition of an optional network interface card (NIC) provides a failover  
capability to a redundant Ethernet connection. If a problem occurs with the  
primary Ethernet connection, all Ethernet traffic that is associated with the  
primary connection is automatically switched to the redundant NIC. If the  
applicable device drivers are installed, this switching occurs without data loss and  
without user intervention.  
v Dual-core or quad-core processing  
The server supports one Intel Xeon dual-core or quad-core microprocessor.  
v RAID support  
The server supports an internal RAID SAS Controller, which is required for you to  
use the hot-swap hard disk drives and to create redundant array of independent  
disks (RAID) configurations.  
v TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) support  
The Ethernet controllers in the server support TOE, which is a technology that  
offloads the TCP/IP flow from the microprocessors and I/O subsystem to increase  
the speed of the TCP/IP flow. When an operating system that supports TOE is  
running on the server and TOE is enabled, the server supports TOE operation.  
See the operating-system documentation for information about enabling TOE.  
Note: As of the date of this document, the Linux® operating system does not  
support TOE.  
Chapter 3. What is included with your server  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
The following information is a summary of the features and specifications of the  
server. Depending on the server model, some features might not be available, or  
some specifications might not apply.  
Table 2. Features and specifications  
Microprocessor:  
SATA optical drives:  
Integrated functions:  
v
Integrated management module (IMM),  
which provides service processor control  
and monitoring functions, video  
controller, and (when the optional virtual  
media key is installed) remote keyboard,  
video, mouse, and remote hard disk  
drive capabilities  
Intel 82574L Gb Ethernet controller with  
TCP/IP Offload Engine (TOE) and Wake  
on LAN support  
v
Supports one Intel® Xeon® 3400 series  
quad-core microprocessor  
v
v
UltraSlim DVD-ROM combo (optional)  
Multi-burner (optional)  
v
v
v
Designed for LGA 1156 socket  
Scalable up to four cores  
Hard disk drive expansion bays  
(depending on the model):Up to four  
3.5-inch hot-swap SAS or up to four  
3.5-inch hot-swap SATA hard disk drive  
bays  
32 KB instruction cache, 32 KB data  
cache, and up to 8 MB cache that is  
shared among the cores  
v
v
v
Support for Intel Extended Memory 64  
Technology (EM64T)  
Up to six expansion slots (depending  
on model):  
Seven Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0  
ports (two front and four rear of the  
chassis), one internal for the optional  
USB Hypervisor key  
Note:  
v
v
Six expansion slots on the system board  
v
Use the Setup Utility to determine the  
type and speed of the microprocessor.  
Two PCI Express Gen2 x8 slots (x8  
links)  
v
v
v
Two Ethernet ports  
v
For a list of supported microprocessors,  
and click the Options tab.  
Four-port integrated SATA controller  
Integrated Trusted Platform Module  
(TPM) support  
One serial port  
One VGA port  
v
v
v
One PCI Express Gen2 x4 slot (x4 link)  
Two PCI 32-bit/33 MHz slots  
One PCI Express Gen2 x4 slot (x4  
electrical and mechanical) for the  
ServeRAID BR10il adapter  
v
v
Memory:  
v
Minimum: 1 GB  
Maximum: 32 GB  
v
16 GB using unbuffered DIMMs  
(UDIMMs)  
Power supply:  
32 GB using registered DIMMs  
(RDIMMs)  
One 401-watt power supply or two  
430-watt high efficiency power supply  
v
Types: PC3-8500 or PC3-10600R-999  
(single-rank or double-rank), 1066, and  
1333 MHz, ECC, DDR3 registered or  
unbuffered SDRAM DIMMs only  
Connectors: Six dual inline memory  
module (DIMM) connectors, two-way  
interleaved  
Fans: The server comes standard with  
three speed-controlled fans.  
v
v
Supports:  
1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB (when  
available) unbuffered DIMMs  
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8 GB (when  
available) registered DIMMs  
10 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 2. Features and specifications (continued)  
RAID controllers: Video controller (integrated into IMM):  
Notes:  
v
v
v
Matrox G200  
Compatible with SVGA and VGA  
128 MB SDRAM video memory  
v
v
v
v
v
ServeRAID BR10il  
ServeRAID-MR10i  
1. Power consumption and heat output  
vary depending on the number and  
type of optional features installed and  
the power-management optional  
features in use.  
ServeRAID-M1015  
ServeRAID M5015  
ServeRAID MR10is VAULT  
Note: The maximum video resolution is  
1280 x 1024  
2. The sound levels were measured in  
controlled acoustical environments  
according to the procedures specified  
by the American National Standards  
Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779  
and are reported in accordance with  
ISO 9296. Actual sound-pressure levels  
in a given location might exceed the  
average values stated because of room  
reflections and other nearby noise  
sources. The noise emission level  
stated is the declared (upper limit)  
sound-power level, in bels, for a  
Size:  
Acoustical noise emissions:  
v
v
v
v
Height: 448 mm (17.63 inches)  
Depth: 483 mm (19.01 inches)  
Width: 265 mm (10.43 inches)  
Maximum weight: 20.8 kg (45.86 lb)  
when fully configured  
v
Sound power, idling: 6.5 bels maximum  
Sound power, operating: 6.5 bels  
maximum  
v
Environment:  
v
Air temperature:  
Heat output:  
Server on: 10°C to 35°C (50.0°F to  
95.0°F); altitude: 0 to 914.4 m (3000 Approximate heat output:  
ft)  
Server on: 10°C to 32°C (50.0°F to  
89.6°F); altitude: 914.4 m (3000 ft) to  
2133.6 m (7000.0 ft)  
Server off: 10°C to 43°C  
(50°F to 109.4°F); maximum altitude:  
2133.6 m (7000.0 ft)  
v
Minimum configuration: 630 BTU per  
hour (185 watts)  
v
Maximum configuration: 1784 BTU per  
hour (523 watts)  
random sample of system.  
3. There is no keyboard connector or  
mouse connector on the server. You  
can connect a USB keyboard and USB  
mouse to the server by using the USB  
connectors.  
Electrical input:  
v
Sine-wave input (50 / 60 Hz) required  
Input voltage low range:  
v
Shipping: -40°C to 60°C  
(-104°F to 140°F)  
Minimum: 100 V ac  
Maximum: 127 V ac  
v
v
Humidity:  
v
v
Input voltage high range:  
Server on: 8% to 80%  
Server off: 8% to 80%  
Minimum: 200 V ac  
Maximum: 240 V ac  
Particulate contamination:  
Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA),  
approximately:  
Attention: Airborne particulates and  
reactive gases acting alone or in  
combination with other environmental  
factors such as humidity or temperature  
might pose a risk to the server.  
Minimum: 0.102 kVA  
Maximum: 0.55 kVA  
Software  
Lenovo provides software to help get your server up and running.  
EasyStartup  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program simplifies the process of your RAID  
controller and installing supported Microsoft® Windows and Linux operating systems  
and device drivers on your server. The EasyStartup program is provided with your  
server on DVD. The DVD is self starting (bootable). The user guide for the  
EasyStartup program is on the DVD and can be accessed directly from the program  
interface. For additional information, see “Using the ThinkServer EasyStartup  
EasyManage  
The ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server provides centralized hardware and  
software inventory management and secure automated system management  
through a centralized console. The ThinkServer EasyManage Agent enables other  
clients on the network to be managed by the centralized console. The ThinkServer  
EasyManage Core Server is supported on Microsoft Windows Server 2008 (32-bit)  
products. The ThinkServer EasyManage Agent is supported on 32-bit and 64-bit  
Windows, Red Hat, and SUSE operating systems.  
Chapter 3. What is included with your server 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reliability, availability, and serviceability  
Three important server design features are reliability, availability, and serviceability  
(RAS). The RAS features help to ensure the integrity of the data that is stored on  
the server, the availability of the server when you need it, and the ease with which  
you can diagnose and correct problems.  
The server has the following RAS features:  
v Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI)  
v Advanced Desktop Management Interface (DMI) features  
v Automatic error retry or recovery  
v Automatic memory downsizing on error detection  
v Automatic restart on nonmaskable interrupt (NMI)  
v Automatic Server Restart (ASR) logic supporting a system restart when the  
operating system becomes unresponsive  
v Automatic server restart after a power failure, based on the UEFI setting  
v Availability of microcode level  
v Automatic BIOS Recovery (ABR)  
v Built-in, menu-driven setup, system configuration, and redundant array of  
independent disks (RAID) configuration  
v Built-in monitoring for fan, power, temperature, and voltage  
v Cooling fans with speed-sensing capability  
v Customer support center that is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week1  
v Diagnostic support of ServeRAID adapters  
v Error codes and messages  
v Error correcting code (ECC) double-data-rate (DDR) synchronous dynamic  
random access memory (SDRAM) with serial presence detect (SPD)  
v Error logging of POST failures  
v Hot-swap SAS hard disk drives  
v Integrated Ethernet controllers  
v Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) 2.0  
v Key-lock support for physical security  
v Memory change messages posted to the error log  
v Power-on self-test (POST)  
v Hardware Failure Prediction alerts  
v Read-only memory (ROM) checksums  
v Redundant Ethernet capabilities (requires an optional Ethernet adapter) with  
failover support  
v Standby voltage for systems-management features and monitoring  
v System auto-configuring from the configuration menu  
v System-error LED on the front bezel and diagnostics LEDs on the system board  
v Upgradeable microcode for POST, UEFI, and read-only memory (ROM) resident  
code, locally or over a LAN  
v VPD: includes serial-number information and replacement part numbers, stored  
in nonvolatile memory, for easier remote maintenance  
1. Service availability will vary by country. Response time varies; may exclude holidays.  
12 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Wake on LAN capability  
Chapter 3. What is included with your server 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power  
This section describes the controls and light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and how to turn  
the server on and off.  
Front view  
The following illustrations show the controls, LEDs, and connectors on the front of  
the server models.  
The following is an illustration of the 3.5-inch SAS/SATA hot-swap hard disk drive  
model:  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
Hard disk drive activity LED (green) ꢀ7ꢁ  
Hard disk drive status LED (amber) ꢀ8ꢁ  
Hard disk drive activity LED  
System error LED  
USB 2  
USB 1  
DVD-eject button  
DVD drive activity LED (green)  
Front information panel  
Power-on LED  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
ꢀ10ꢁ  
ꢀ11ꢁ  
Power-control button  
The following is an illustration of the 3.5-inch SATA simple-swap hard disk drive  
model:  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
Simple-swap hard disk drive  
DVD drive activity LED (green)  
Front information panel  
Power-on LED  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
ꢀ10ꢁ  
Hard disk drive activity LED  
System error LED  
USB 2  
USB 1  
DVD-eject button  
Power-control button  
DVD drive activity LED: When this LED is lit, it indicates that the DVD drive is in  
use.  
System-power LED: When this LED is lit and not flashing, it indicates that the  
server is turned on. When this LED is flashing, it indicates that the server is turned  
off and still connected to an ac power source. When this LED is off, it indicates that  
ac power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself has failed. A  
system-power LED is also on the rear of the server.  
Power-control button and power-on LED: Press this button to turn the server on  
and off manually or to wake the server from a reduced-power state. The states of  
the power-on LED are as follows:  
Off: AC power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself has failed.  
Flashing rapidly (4 times per second): The server is turned off and is not  
ready to be turned on. The power-control button is disabled. This will last  
approximately 1 to 3 minutes.  
Flashing slowly (once per second): The server is turned off and is ready to be  
turned on. You can press the power-control button to turn on the server.  
Lit: The server is turned on.  
16 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fading on and off: The server is in a reduced-power state. To wake the server,  
press the power-control button or use the IMM Web interface. See “Logging on  
to the Web interface” on page 125 for information on logging on to the IMM Web  
interface.  
Hard-disk drive activity LED: When this LED is flashing, it indicates that a hard  
disk drive is in use.  
System-locator LED: Use this LED to visually locate the server among other  
servers.  
System-information LED: When this LED is lit, it indicates that a noncritical event  
has occurred.  
System-error LED: When this LED is lit, it indicates that a system error has  
occurred.  
USB 1 and 2 connectors: Connect USB devices to these connectors.  
DVD-eject button: Press this button to release a CD or DVD from the DVD drive.  
Hard-disk drive status LED: On some server models, each hot-swap hard disk  
drive has a status LED. When this LED is lit, it indicates that the drive has failed. If  
an optional RAID controller is installed in the server, when this LED is flashing  
slowly (one flash per second), it indicates that the drive is being rebuilt. When the  
LED is flashing rapidly (three flashes per second), it indicates that the controller is  
identifying the drive.  
Hard-disk drive activity LED: When this LED is flashing, it indicates that the drive  
is in use.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rear view  
The following illustration shows the connectors and LEDs on the rear of the server.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
USB 3 and 4  
USB 1 and 2  
Ethernet connectors  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
Serial (Com1)  
Power cord connector  
Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED  
(amber)  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Video connector  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
Ethernet link status LED (green)  
USB 1-4 connectors: Connect a USB device, such as USB mouse or keyboard, to  
any of these connectors.  
Ethernet 10/100/1000 connector: Use these connectors to connect the server to a  
network.  
Power-cord connector: Connect the power cord to this connector.  
Video connector: Connect a monitor to this connector.  
Serial 1 connector (COM 1): Connect a 9-pin serial device to this connector. The  
serial port is shared with the integrated management module (IMM). The IMM can  
take control of the shared serial port to perform text console redirection and to  
redirect serial traffic, using Serial over LAN (SOL).  
Ethernet connectors: Use either of these connectors to connect the server to a  
network. When you use the Ethernet 1 connector, the network can be shared with  
the IMM through a single network cable.  
18 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System-board internal connectors  
The following illustrations show the internal connectors and switches on the system  
board.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ DIMM 1  
ꢀ11Fan 1 connector  
ꢀ21Slot 2: PCIe2 x8, 25w  
ꢀ2ꢁ DIMM 2  
ꢀ12Hard disk backplane ꢀ22Slot 1: PCIe2 x8, 25w  
configuration  
connector  
ꢀ3ꢁ DIMM 3  
ꢀ13Operator information ꢀ23Battery  
panel connector  
ꢀ4ꢁ DIMM 4  
ꢀ14Simple-swap HDD  
backplane signal  
connector  
ꢀ24Power 2 connector  
ꢀ5ꢁ DIMM 5  
ꢀ15Wake-on-LAN  
ꢀ25Virtual media key connector  
ꢀ26Power 1 connector  
connector  
ꢀ6ꢁ DIMM 6  
ꢀ16Optical drive  
connector  
ꢀ7ꢁ Microprocessor ꢀ17Hypervisor flash  
ꢀ27Power 3 connector  
device connector  
ꢀ8ꢁ Fan 3  
connector  
ꢀ18Slot 5: PCI 32-bit, 33 ꢀ28Power 4 connector  
MHz  
ꢀ9ꢁ Fan 2  
connector  
ꢀ19Slot 4: PCI 32-bit, 33 ꢀ29Not used  
MHz  
ꢀ10RAID  
controller  
connector  
ꢀ20Slot 3: PCIe2 x1, 10w ꢀ30Not used  
System-board external connectors  
The following illustration shows the external input/output connectors and the NMI  
button on the system board.  
ꢀ1ꢁ Serial (com 1) connector  
ꢀ5ꢁ Ethernet connector 2  
ꢀ2ꢁ Video connector  
ꢀ6ꢁ USB connectors 3 and 4  
20 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ3ꢁ Ethernet connector 1  
ꢀ7ꢁ SW1 (NMI button)  
ꢀ4ꢁ USB connectors 1 and 2  
System-board switches and jumpers  
The following illustration shows the switches and jumpers on the system board.  
The following table describes the jumpers on the system board.  
Table 3. System board jumpers  
Jumper number  
Jumper name  
Jumper setting  
JP1  
Clear CMOS jumper ꢀ1ꢁ  
v Pins 1 and 2: Keep CMOS  
data (default).  
v Pins 2 and 3: Clear CMOS  
data (including power-on  
password and  
administrator password)  
JP6  
Boot block jumper ꢀ2ꢁ  
v Pins 1 and 2: Boot from  
primary BIOS page  
(default) .  
v Pins 2 and 3: Boot from  
backup BIOS page.  
Notes:  
1. If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the pins are set to 1 and 2.  
2. Changing the position of the UEFI boot recovery jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and  
3 before the server is turned on alters which flash ROM page is loaded. Do not change  
the jumper pin position after the server is turned on. This can cause an unpredictable  
problem.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important:  
1. Before you change any switch settings or move any jumpers, turn off the server;  
then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. Review the information in  
2. Any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are not shown in the illustrations  
in this document are reserved.  
System-board LEDs  
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the system board.  
ꢀ1ꢁ Fan 5 error LED  
ꢀ2ꢁ Fan 4 error LED  
ꢀ3ꢁ H8 Heartbeat LED  
ꢀ4ꢁ Fan 3 error LED  
ꢀ5ꢁ Fan 2 error LED  
ꢀ6ꢁ Fan 1 error LED  
ꢀ9ꢁ PCI Express slot 2 error LED  
ꢀ10ꢁ PCI Express slot 1 error LED  
ꢀ11ꢁ Microprocessor error LED  
ꢀ12ꢁ Battery error LED  
ꢀ13ꢁ Standby power LED  
ꢀ14ꢁ System board error LED  
ꢀ7ꢁ SAS/SATA Controller LED ꢀ15ꢁ DIMM 1-6 error LEDs  
ꢀ8ꢁ IMM heart beat LED  
Table 4. System-board LEDs  
LED  
Description  
Error LEDs  
When one of these LEDs is lit, it indicates that the associated  
component has failed.  
22 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 4. System-board LEDs (continued)  
LED  
Description  
Baseboard management  
controller heartbeat LED  
This LED flashes to indicate that the IMM is functioning  
normally.  
Standby power LED  
When this LED is lit, it indicates that the server is connected  
to ac power.  
The following table describes the LEDs on the system board and extender card and  
suggested actions to correct the detected problems.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
System error or  
information LED lit  
Description  
Action  
DIMM 1 to DIMM 6  
error LEDs  
A DIMM has failed or is incorrectly  
installed.  
1. Remove the DIMM that is indicated by a lit error  
LED.  
2. Reseat the DIMM.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. DIMM  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
CPU 1 error LED  
Microprocessor 1 has failed, is  
missing, or has been incorrectly  
installed.  
Note: (Trained service technician  
only) Make sure that the  
microprocessors are installed in the  
correct sequence; see the  
procedures for removing and  
installing a microprocessor in the  
Hardware Maintenance Manual.  
1. Check the system-event log to determine the  
reason for the lit LED.  
2. (Trained service technician) Reseat the failing  
microprocessor.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. (Trained service technician only) Failing  
microprocessor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
CPU mismatch LED  
VRM failure LED  
A mismatched microprocessor has  
been installed.  
Note: All microprocessors must  
have the same speed and cache  
size.  
1. Run the Setup Utility and view the microprocessor  
information to compare the installed  
microprocessor specifications.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and  
replace one of the microprocessors so that they  
both match.  
Microprocessor 2 VRM has failed or  
is incorrectly installed.  
1. Reseat the VRM  
2. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. VRM  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
3. Replace the VRM  
System-board error  
LED  
System-board CPU VRD, power  
voltage regulators, or both have  
failed.  
(Trained service technician only) Replace the system  
board.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
System error or  
information LED lit  
Description  
Action  
Battery failure LED  
IMM heartbeat LED  
Battery low.  
1. Replace the CMOS lithium battery, if necessary.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Indicates the status of the boot  
process of the IMM.  
If the LED does not begin flashing within 30 seconds  
of when the server is connected to power, do the  
following:  
When the server is connected to  
power this LED flashes quickly to  
indicate that the IMM code is  
loading. When the loading is  
complete, the LED stops flashing  
briefly and then flashes slowly to  
indicate that the IMM if fully  
operational and you can press the  
power-control button to start the  
server.  
1. (Trained service technician only) Use the IMM  
recovery switch to recover the firmware (see  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
PCI slot 1 to PCI slot An error has occurred on a PCI bus  
1. Check the system-event log for information about  
the error.  
8 error LEDs  
or on the system board. An  
additional LED is lit next to a failing  
PCI slot.  
2. If you cannot isolate the failing adapter through the  
LEDs and the information in the system-event log,  
remove one adapter at a time, and restart the  
server after each adapter is removed.  
3. If the failure remains, call Lenovo Service and  
Support for additional troubleshooting information.  
H8 heartbeat LED  
Indicates the status of power-on and  
power-off sequencing.  
1. If the H8 heartbeat LED is blinking at a 1 Hz rate,  
no action is necessary.  
2. (Trained service technician only) If the H8  
heartbeat LED is not blinking, replace the system  
board.  
Power-supply LEDs  
The following minimum configuration is required for the server to start:  
v One microprocessor  
v One 1 GB DIMM  
v Power supply  
v Power cord  
v ServeRAID SAS/SATA adapter  
v System board assembly  
The following illustration shows the location of the power supply LEDs:  
24 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
AC power LED  
DC power LED  
Fault LED  
Fault LED  
Power LED  
The following table describes the problems that are indicated by various  
combinations of the power-supply LEDs and the power-on LED on the front  
information panel and suggested actions to correct the detected problems.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. Power-supply LEDs  
Power-supply LEDs  
AC  
DC  
Error  
Off  
Description  
Action  
Notes  
Off  
Off  
No ac power to  
the server or a  
problem with the  
ac power source  
This is a normal  
condition when no  
ac power is present.  
1. Check the ac power to the server.  
2. Make sure that the power cord is  
connected to a functioning power  
source.  
3. Turn the server off and then turn the  
server back on.  
4. If the problem remains, replace the  
power supply.  
Off  
Off  
On  
No ac power to  
the server or a  
problem with the  
ac power source  
and the power  
supply had  
This happens only  
when a second  
power supply is  
providing power to  
the server.  
1. Replace the power supply.  
2. Make sure that the power cord is  
connected to a functioning power  
source.  
detected an  
internal problem  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
Off  
Faulty power  
supply  
Replace the power supply.  
Replace the power supply.  
Faulty power  
supply  
Power supply not  
fully seated,  
faulty system  
board, or faulty  
power supply  
Typically indicates  
that a power supply  
is not fully seated.  
1. Reseat the power supply.  
2. If the system board error (fault) LED is  
not lit, replace the power supply.  
3. If the system board error (fault) LED is  
lit, (Trained service technician only)  
replace the system board.  
On  
Off or  
Flashing  
On  
Faulty power  
supply  
Replace the power supply.  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
Normal operation  
Power supply is Replace the power supply.  
faulty but still  
operational  
Server power features  
When the server is connected to an ac power source but is not turned on, the  
operating system does not run, and all core logic except for the service processor  
(the integrated management module) is shut down; however, the server can  
respond to requests to the service processor, such as a remote request to turn on  
the server. The power-on LED flashes to indicate that the server is connected to ac  
power but is not turned on.  
Turning on the server  
Approximately 5 seconds after the server is connected to ac power, one or more  
fans might start running to provide cooling while the server is connected to power  
and the power-on button LED flashes quickly. Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after  
26 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the server is connected to ac power, the power-control button becomes active (the  
power-on LED flashes slowly). You can turn on the server by pressing the  
power-control button.  
The server can also be turned on in any of the following ways:  
v If a power failure occurs while the server is turned on, the server will restart  
automatically when power is restored.  
v If your operating system supports the Wake on LAN® feature, the Wake on LAN  
feature can turn on the server.  
Note: When 4 GB or more of memory (physical or logical) is installed, some  
memory is reserved for various system resources and is unavailable to the  
operating system. The amount of memory that is reserved for system resources  
depends on the operating system, the configuration of the server, and the  
configured peripheral component interconnect (PCI) devices.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turning off the server  
When you turn off the server and leave it connected to ac power, the server can  
respond to requests to the service processor, such as a remote request to turn on  
the server. While the server remains connected to ac power, one or more fans  
might continue to run. To remove all power from the server, you must disconnect it  
from the power source.  
Some operating systems require an orderly shutdown before you turn off the server.  
See your operating-system documentation for information about shutting down the  
operating system.  
Statement 5:  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power  
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device  
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current  
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power  
source.  
2
1
The server can be turned off in any of the following ways:  
v You can turn off the server from the operating system, if your operating system  
supports this feature. After an orderly shutdown of the operating system, the  
server will be turned off automatically.  
v You can press the power-control button to start an orderly shutdown of the  
operating system and turn off the server, if your operating system supports this  
feature.  
v If the operating system stops functioning, you can press and hold the  
power-control button for more than 4 seconds to turn off the server.  
v The server can be turned off by the Wake on LAN feature.  
v The integrated management module (IMM) can turn off the server as an  
automatic response to a critical system failure.  
28 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices  
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing optional hardware devices in  
the server.  
Installation guidelines  
Before you install optional devices, read the following information:  
v Read the safety information that begins on page vii, “Working inside the server  
and the guidelines in this section. This information will help you work safely.  
v When you install your new server, take the opportunity to download and apply  
the most recent firmware updates. This step will help to ensure that any known  
issues are addressed and that your server is ready to function at maximum levels  
of performance. To download firmware updates for your server, do the following:  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select  
Servers and Storage from the Select your product list.  
3. Select Servers and Storage from the Brand list.  
4. From Family list, select ThinkServer TS200, and click Continue.  
5. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
v Before you install optional hardware, make sure that the server is working  
correctly. If an operating system is installed, start the server, and make sure that  
the operating system starts. If no operating system is installed, make sure that a  
19990305 error code is displayed, indicating that an operating system was not  
found but the server is otherwise working correctly. If the server is not working  
correctly, refer to the Hardware Maintenance Manual for diagnostic information.  
v Observe good housekeeping in the area where you are working. Place removed  
covers and other parts in a safe place.  
v If you must start the server while the cover is removed, make sure that no one is  
near the server and that no tools or other objects have been left inside the  
server.  
v Do not attempt to lift an object that you think is too heavy for you. If you have to  
lift a heavy object, observe the following precautions:  
– Make sure that you can stand safely without slipping.  
– Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet.  
– Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly or twist when you lift a heavy  
object.  
To avoid straining the muscles in your back, lift by standing or by pushing up  
with your leg muscles.  
v Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical  
outlets for the server, monitor, and other devices.  
v Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.  
v Have a small flat-blade screwdriver available.  
v To view the error LEDs on the system board and internal components, leave the  
server connected to power.  
v You do not have to turn off the server to install or replace hot-swap fans,  
redundant hot-swap ac power supplies, or hot-plug Universal Serial Bus (USB)  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
devices. However, you must turn off the server before performing any steps that  
involve removing or installing adapter cables or non-hot-swap optional devices or  
components.  
v Blue on a component indicates touch points, where you can grip the component  
to remove it from or install it in the server, open or close a latch, and so on.  
v Orange on a component or an orange label on or near a component indicates  
that the component can be hot-swapped, which means that if the server and  
operating system support hot-swap capability, you can remove or install the  
component while the server is running. (Orange can also indicate touch points on  
hot-swap components.) See the instructions for removing or installing a specific  
hot-swap component for any additional procedures that you might have to  
perform before you remove or install the component.  
v When you are finished working on the server, reinstall all safety shields, guards,  
labels, and ground wires.  
v For a list of supported optional devices for the server, see  
v When working inside the server, you might find some tasks easier if you lay the  
server on its side.  
System reliability guidelines  
To help ensure proper cooling and system reliability, make sure that the following  
requirements are met:  
v Each of the drive bays has a drive or an electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)  
shield installed in it.  
v If the server has redundant power, each of the power-supply bays has a  
power-supply installed in it.  
v There is adequate space around the server to allow the server cooling system to  
work properly. Leave approximately 50 mm (2.0 in.) of open space around the  
front and rear of the server. Do not place objects in front of the fans. For proper  
cooling and airflow, replace the left-side cover before you turn on the server.  
Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30 minutes) with  
the left-side cover removed might damage server components.  
v You have followed the cabling instructions that come with optional adapters.  
v You have replaced a failed fan within 48 hours.  
v You have replaced a hot-swap drive within 2 minutes of removal.  
v You do not remove the air duct or air baffles while the server is running.  
Operating the server without the air duct or air baffles might cause the  
microprocessor to overheat.  
v Microprocessor socket 2 always contains either a microprocessor duct or a  
microprocessor and heat sink.  
Working inside the server with the power on  
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when  
the server is powered on might cause the server to halt, which might result in the  
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge  
wrist strap or other grounding system when you work inside the server with the  
power on.  
The server supports hot-swap devices and is designed to operate safely while it is  
turned on and the cover is removed. Follow these guidelines when you work inside  
a server that is turned on:  
30 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Avoid wearing loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts  
before working inside the server; do not wear cuff links while you are working  
inside the server.  
v Do not allow your necktie or scarf to hang inside the server.  
v Remove jewelry, such as bracelets, necklaces, rings, and loose-fitting wrist  
watches.  
v Remove items from your shirt pocket, such as pens and pencils, that might fall  
into the server as you lean over it.  
v Avoid dropping any metallic objects, such as paper clips, hairpins, and screws,  
into the server.  
Handling static-sensitive devices  
Attention: Static electricity can damage the server and other electronic devices.  
To avoid damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages  
until you are ready to install them.  
To reduce the possibility of damage from electrostatic discharge, observe the  
following precautions:  
v Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around  
you.  
v Wear an electrostatic-discharge wrist strap, if one is available.  
v Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.  
v Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed circuitry.  
v Do not leave the device where others can handle and damage it.  
v While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted  
metal part of the server for at least 2 seconds. This drains static electricity from  
the package and from your body.  
v Remove the device from its package and install it directly into the server without  
setting down the device. If it is necessary to set down the device, put it back into  
its static-protective package. Do not place the device on the server cover or on a  
metal surface.  
v Take additional care when handling devices during cold weather. Heating reduces  
indoor humidity and increases static electricity.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Server components  
The following illustration shows the major components in the server.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Cover  
ꢀ10ꢁ SATA hard disk drive (some models)  
ꢀ11ꢁ Hot-swap hard disk drive (some  
models)  
Non-hot-swap power supply  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
System board  
DIMM  
ꢀ12ꢁ Front adapter-support bracket  
ꢀ13ꢁ Drive cage  
ꢀ14ꢁ Hard disk drive fan assembly  
ꢀ15ꢁ SAS/SATA connector  
ꢀ16ꢁ Microprocessor  
Rear system fan  
Optical drive  
Filler panels  
Upper bezel  
Lower bezel  
ꢀ17ꢁ Heat sink  
Blue on a component indicates touch points, where you can grip the component to  
remove it from or install it in the server, open or close a latch, and so on.  
Orange on a component or an orange label on or near a component indicates that  
the component can be hot-swapped, which means that if the server and operating  
system support hot-swap capability, you can remove or install the component while  
the server is running. (Orange can also indicate touch points on hot-swap  
components.) See the instructions for removing or installing a specific hot-swap  
component for any additional procedures that you might have to perform before you  
remove or install the component.  
Removing the side cover  
Important: Before you install optional hardware, make sure that the server is  
working correctly. Start the server, and make sure that the operating system starts,  
if an operating system is installed. If the server is not working correctly, see the  
Hardware Maintenance Manual for diagnostic information.  
To remove the server side cover, complete the following steps.  
32 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attention: Operating the server for more than 30 minutes with the side cover  
removed might damage server components. For proper cooling and airflow, replace  
the side cover before turning on the server.  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices (see “Turning off the server” on  
page 28); then, disconnect all power cords and external cables.  
3. Unlock the side cover ꢀ2ꢁ; then, press the cover-release latch down ꢀ1ꢁ; then,  
remove the cover and set it aside.  
To replace the side cover, see “Installing the side cover.”  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the cover before turning on the  
server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30 minutes)  
with the cover removed might damage server components.  
Installing the side cover  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the side cover before turning on  
the server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30  
minutes) with the side cover removed might damage server components.  
To install the side cover, complete the following steps:  
1. Make sure that all cables, adapters, and other components are installed and  
seated correctly and that you have not left loose tools or parts inside the server.  
Also, make sure that all internal cables are correctly routed.  
2. If you removed the upper and lower bezels, reinstall them before you replace  
Important: The cover lock must be in the unlocked (opened) position before  
you install the side cover.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Position the lip on the bottom edge of the side cover on the ledge on the bottom  
of the chassis; then, rotate the cover up to the chassis. Press down on the  
cover release latch and push the cover completely closed until it latches  
securely into place.  
4. Lock the side cover.  
5. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing the two-piece bezel  
When you work with some devices, such as drives in bays 1 through 7 (see page  
43), you must first remove the two-piece bezel to access the devices.  
Note:  
v Before you remove the upper bezel, you must unlock and remove the side cover  
and remove the lower bezel.  
v If you are removing only the lower bezel, you do not have to remove the side  
cover. However, the side cover must be unlocked.  
To remove the two-piece bezel, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Unlock the side cover.  
3. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 32).  
4. Press the round blue release button on the right side of the lower bezel and tilt  
the lower bezel forward to disengage it from the chassis.  
34 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Lift the lower bezel to disengage the two bottom tabs from the chassis. Set the  
lower bezel aside.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Carefully pull the two bezel clips ꢀ1ꢁ on the left side of the upper bezel away  
from the chassis; then, rotate the upper bezel to the right side of the server to  
disengage the two right-side tabs from the chassis. Set the upper bezel aside.  
For instructions for replacing the two-piece bezel, see “Installing the lower bezel”  
Installing the lower bezel  
To install the lower bezel, complete the following steps:  
1. Insert the two bottom tabs on the lower bezel into the corresponding holes in  
the front of the chassis.  
36 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Rotate the top of the lower bezel up to the chassis; then, press the blue release  
tab on the right side of the lower bezel and completely close the lower bezel  
until it locks securely into place.  
3. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Installing the upper bezel  
To install the upper bezel, complete the following steps:  
1. Insert the two tabs on the right-side of the upper bezel into the corresponding  
holes on the right side of the chassis.  
2. Rotate the upper bezel to the left side of the chassis until the bezel clips are  
aligned with the corresponding indentations on the left side of the chassis and it  
snaps into place.  
3. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 36).  
4. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
5. Lock the side cover.  
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing a memory module  
To remove a dual inline memory module (DIMM), complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 32).  
4. Locate the DIMM connector that contains the DIMM that is to be replaced (see  
Attention: To avoid breaking the DIMM retaining clips or damaging the DIMM  
connectors, open and close the clips gently.  
5. Carefully open the retaining clips on each end ꢀ2ꢁ of the DIMM connector and  
remove the DIMM ꢀ1ꢁ.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. If you are instructed to return the DIMM, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a memory module  
The following notes describe the types of dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) that  
the server supports and other information that you must consider when you install  
DIMMs (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 19 for the location of the  
DIMM connectors):  
v The server supports industry-standard, 1066 or 1333 MHz, PC3-10600R-999  
(single-rank or dual-rank) double-data-rate 3 (DDR3), registered, synchronous  
dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs)  
with error correcting code (ECC). See http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver and  
click the Options tab for a list of supported memory modules for the server.  
v The maximum amount of memory that the server supports is dependent on the  
type of memory that you install in the server. See “Unbuffered DIMMs (UDIMMs)”  
v The amount of usable memory is reduced, depending on the system  
configuration. A certain amount of memory must be reserved for system  
resources. To view the total amount of installed memory and the amount of  
configured memory, run the Setup utility. For additional information, see “Using  
v The maximum operating speed of the server is determined by the slowest DIMM  
in the server.  
v If you install a pair of DIMMs in DIMM connectors 2 and 5, the size and speed of  
the DIMMs that you install in DIMM connectors 2 and 5 must match each other.  
How ever, they do not have to be the same size and speed as the DIMMs that  
are installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 4.  
v You can use compatible DIMMs from various manufacturers in the same pair.  
v When you install or remove DIMMs, the server configuration information  
changes. When you restart the server, the system displays a message that  
indicates that the memory configuration has changed.  
v The specifications of a DDR3 DIMM are on a label on the DIMM, in the following  
format.  
ggg eRxff-PC3-wwwwwm-aa-bb-cc  
38 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
where:  
ggg is the total capacity of the DIMM (for example, 1GB, 2GB, or 4GB)  
e is the number of ranks  
1 = single-rank  
2 = dual-rank  
4 = quad-rank  
ff is the device organization (bit width)  
4 = x4 organization (4 DQ lines per SDRAM)  
8 = x8 organization  
16 = x16 organization  
wwwww is the DIMM bandwidth, in MBps  
8500 = 8.53 GBps (PC3-1066 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
10600 = 10.66 GBps (PC3-1333 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
m is the DIMM type  
E = Unbuffered DIMM (UDIMM) with ECC (x72-bit module data bus)  
R = Registered DIMM (RDIMM)  
U = Unbuffered DIMM with no ECC (x64-bit primary data bus)  
aa is the CAS latency, in clocks at maximum operating frequency  
bb is the JEDEC SPD Revision Encoding and Additions level  
cc is the reference design file for the design of the DIMM  
d is the revision number of the reference design of the DIMM  
Note: To determine the type of a DIMM, see the label on the DIMM. The  
information on the label is in the format xxxxx nRxxx PC3-xxxxx-xx-xx-xxx. The  
numeral in the sixth numerical position indicates whether the DIMM is single-rank  
(n=1) or dual-rank (n=2).  
The following sections provide additional information specific to unbuffered and  
registered DIMMs that you must consider.  
Unbuffered DIMMs (UDIMMs)  
The following notes provide information that you must configure when you install  
UDIMMs:  
v The memory channels run at the fastest common frequency of the installed  
DIMMs.  
v Do not use both UDIMMs and RDIMMs in the same server.  
v Using ECC and non-ECC UDIMMs in the server will cause the server to run in  
non-ECC mode.  
v The UDIMM options that are available for the server are 1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB  
(when available) memory DIMMs.  
v You can install a maximum of 16 GB of memory in some server models when  
you use UDIMMs.  
v The server supports up to two single-rank or dual-rank UDIMMs per channel.  
v DIMM slots 3 and 6 are not supported when you install UDIMMs in the server.  
Do not install DIMMs in these connectors.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v The following table lists the supported UDIMM population.  
Table 6. Supported UDIMM population per channel  
Ranks per  
DIMMs slots  
per channel  
DIMMs installed  
in each channel DIMM type  
DIMM (any  
combination)  
DIMM speed  
2
1
2
Unbuffered  
DDR3 ECC  
1066, 1333  
single-rank,  
dual-rank  
2
Unbuffered  
DDR3 ECC  
1066, 1333  
single-rank,  
dual-rank  
v The following table lists the maximum DIMM population using ranked UDIMM.  
Table 7. Maximum memory population using ranked UDIMMs (depending on your model)  
Number of UDIMMs DIMM type  
DIMM size  
single-rank UDIMMs 1 GB  
single-rank UDIMMs 2 GB  
Total memory  
4 GB  
4
4
4
4
8 GB  
dual-rank UDIMMs  
dual-rank UDIMMs  
2 GB  
8 GB  
4 GB (when  
available)  
16 GB  
v The following table lists the UDIMM memory population rule to optimize the  
system performance.  
Table 8. UDIMMs population rule for dual-channel symmetric mode  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
connector 1 connector 2 connector 3 connector 4 connector 5 connector 6  
populated  
populated  
populated  
empty  
empty  
empty  
empty  
empty  
empty  
empty  
empty  
empty  
empty  
populated  
populated  
empty  
populated  
populated  
Registered DIMMs (RDIMMs)  
The following notes provide information that you must consider when you install  
RDIMMs:  
v The memory channels run at the fastest common frequency of the installed  
DIMMs.  
v Do not use both RDIMMs and UDIMMs in the same server.  
v The server supports up to three single-rank, dual-rank, or quad-rank RDIMMs per  
channel.  
v The RDIMM options that are available for the server are 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and  
8 GB (when available) memory DIMMs.  
v You can install a maximum of 32 GB of memory in the server when you use  
RDIMMs.  
40 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v The following table lists the supported RDIMM population.  
Table 9. Supported RDIMM population per channel  
Ranks per  
DIMMs slots  
per channel  
DIMMs installed  
in each channel DIMM type  
DIMM (any  
combination)  
DIMM speed  
3
3
3
3
3
1
2
3
1
2
Registered  
DDR3 ECC  
1066, 1333  
single-rank,  
dual-rank  
Registered  
DDR3 ECC  
1066, 1333  
800  
single-rank,  
dual-rank  
Registered  
DDR3 ECC  
single-rank,  
dual-rank  
Registered  
DDR3 ECC  
1066  
quad-rank  
Registered  
DDR3 ECC  
800  
quad-rank  
v The following table lists the maximum DIMM population using ranked RDIMM.  
Table 10. Maximum memory population using ranked RDIMMs (depending on your model)  
Number of RDIMMs DIMM type  
DIMM size  
single-rank RDIMMs 1 GB  
single-rank RDIMMs 2 GB  
Total memory  
6 GB  
6
6
6
4
4
6
4
12 GB  
dual-rank RDIMMs  
dual-rank RDIMMs  
quad-rank RDIMMs  
dual-rank RDIMMs  
quad-rank RDIMMs  
2 GB  
4 GB  
4 GB  
4 GB  
12 GB  
16 GB  
16 GB  
24 GB  
8 GB (when  
available)  
32 GB  
v The following table lists the RDIMM memory population rule to optimize the  
system performance.  
Table 11. RDIMMs population rule for dual-channel symmetric mode  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
connector 1 connector 2 connector 3 connector 4 connector 5 connector 6  
populated  
populated  
populated  
populated  
empty  
empty  
empty  
empty  
empty  
empty  
empty  
populated  
populated  
populated  
empty  
empty  
populated  
populated  
empty  
populated  
populated  
empty  
populated  
populated  
See “System-board internal connectors” on page 19 for the location of the DIMM  
connectors on the system board.  
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when  
the server is powered-on might cause the server to stop, which could result in the  
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge  
wrist strap or other grounding system when working inside the server with the  
power on.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To install a DIMM, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and  
all external cables, if necessary.  
4. Locate the DIMM connectors on the system board. Determine the connectors  
into which you will install the DIMMs. Install the DIMMs in the sequence shown  
in the following table.  
Table 12. DIMM installation sequence  
Number of DIMMs  
First pair of DIMMs  
Second pair of DIMMs  
Third pair of DIMMs  
Installation sequence (connectors)  
1, 4  
2, 5  
3, 6  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM  
connectors, open and close the clips gently.  
5. Open the retaining clip on each end of the DIMM connector.  
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the DIMM to any unpainted  
metal surface on the outside of the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the  
package.  
7. Turn the DIMM so that the DIMM keys align correctly with the connector.  
8. Insert the DIMM into the connector by aligning the edges of the DIMM with the  
slots at the ends of the DIMM connector (see “System-board internal  
connectors” on page 19 for the location of the DIMM connectors).  
9. Firmly press the DIMM straight down into the connector by applying pressure on  
both ends of the DIMM simultaneously. The retaining clips snap into the locked  
position when the DIMM is firmly seated in the connector.  
Note: If there is a gap between the DIMM and the retaining clips, the DIMM  
has not been correctly inserted; open the retaining clips, remove the DIMM, and  
then reinsert it.  
42 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to  
Removing and installing internal drives  
See “Specifications” on page 10 for information about the types of drives that the  
server supports and other important information. The following figure shows the  
locations of the drive bays (ꢀ1ꢁ - ꢀ7ꢁ) in the server.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following notes describe the types of drives that the server supports and other  
information that you must consider when installing a drive:  
v Make sure that you have all the cables and other equipment that is specified in  
the documentation that comes with the drive.  
v Select the bay in which you want to install the drive.  
v Check the instructions that come with the drive to see whether you have to set  
any switches or jumpers on the drive. If you are installing a SAS or SATA device,  
be sure to set the SAS or SATA ID for that device.  
v Optional internal or external USB diskette drives, tape drives, DVD-ROM, and  
multiburner drives are examples of removable-media drives. You can install  
removable-media drives in bays 1, 2, and 3 only.  
v The SATA removable-media drives that you install in bay 1 connects to the SATA  
4 connector on the system board and the drive in bay 2 connects to the SATA 5  
connector on the system board.  
v To install a 3.5-inch drive in a 5.25-inch bay, you must use the 5.25-inch  
conversion kit.  
v The electromagnetic interference (EMI) integrity and cooling of the server are  
protected by having all bays and PCI and PCI Express slots covered or  
occupied. When you install a drive, PCI, or PCI Express adapter, save the EMC  
shield and filler panel from the bay or PCI or PCI Express adapter slot cover in  
the event that you later remove the device.  
v See http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver and click the Options tab for a list of  
supported options.  
Removing a DVD drive  
To remove a DVD drive, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 32).  
4. Remove the lower bezel, and then remove the upper bezel (see “Removing the  
5. Disconnect the power and signal cables from the drive that is to be removed.  
6. Press and hold the blue release button on the side of the bay to release the  
drive; then, pull the drive out of the front of the server.  
44 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Release buttons  
Drive retainer clip  
7. Remove the drive retainer clip from the side of the drive. Save the clip to use  
when you install the replacement drive.  
8. If you are instructed to return the drive, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a DVD drive  
To install a DVD drive, complete the following steps:  
1. If you are replacing a removed drive with a new drive, make sure that:  
v You have all the cables and other equipment that is specified in the  
documentation that comes with the new drive.  
v You have checked the instructions that come with the new drive to  
determine whether you must set any switches or jumpers in the drive.  
v You have removed the blue optical drive rails from the side of the old drive  
and have them available for installation on the new drive.  
Note: If you are installing a drive that contains a laser, observe the following  
safety precaution.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 3:  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices,  
or transmitters) are installed, note the following:  
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product  
could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no  
serviceable parts inside the device.  
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other  
than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation  
exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser  
diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view  
directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the  
beam.  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Laser Klasse 1  
Laser Klass 1  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
`
Appareil A Laser de Classe 1  
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new DVD drive to any  
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the DVD drive from the  
package and place it on a static-protective surface.  
3. Follow the instructions that come with the drive to set jumpers or switches, if  
there are any.  
Note: You might find it easier to install the new drive from the front and then  
attach the cables.  
4. If you are installing a 3.5-inch drive in bay 2, attach a 5.25-inch conversion kit  
to the 3.5-inch drive. Remove the drive retainer clip from the side of the drive  
cage of bay 1 or bay 2. Slide the drive retainer clip to the front to remove it  
from the drive cage; then, snap the drive retainer clip into the screw holes on  
the side of the drive.  
46 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Release buttons  
Drive retainer clip  
5. Push the drive into the bay.  
6. Connect the power and signal cables to the drive.  
Note: Route the signal cable so that it does not block the airflow to the rear of  
the drives or over the microprocessor and dual inline memory modules  
(DIMMs).  
7. Install the upper bezel (see “Installing the upper bezel” on page 37).  
8. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 36).  
9. Install and lock the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
10. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing a tape drive  
To remove a tape drive, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and  
all external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
4. Remove the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 36).  
5. Remove the upper bezel (see “Installing the upper bezel” on page 37).  
6. Disconnect the power and signal cables from the drive that is to be removed.  
7. Press and hold the blue release button on the side of the bay to release the  
drive; then, pull the drive out of the front of the server.  
8. Remove the drive retainer clip from the side of the drive. Save the clip to use  
when you install the replacement drive.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
EMC shield  
Tape drive  
Drive retainer clip  
9. If you are instructed to return the drive, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a tape drive  
To install a tape drive, complete the following steps:  
1. If you are replacing a removed drive with a new drive, make sure that:  
v You have all the cables and other equipment that is specified in the  
documentation that comes with the new drive.  
v You check the instructions that come with the new drive to determine  
whether you must set any switches or jumpers on the drive.  
v You have removed the drive retainer clip on the side of the old drive and  
have it available for installation on the new drive.  
2. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
3. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords  
and all external cables.  
4. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
5. Remove the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 36).  
6. Remove the upper bezel (see “Installing the upper bezel” on page 37).  
7. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted  
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and  
place it on a static-protective surface.  
48 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Set any jumpers or switches on the drive according to the documentation that  
comes with the drive.  
9. Remove the drive retainer clip from the side of the drive cage of bay 1 or bay  
2. Slide the drive retainer clip to the front to remove it from the drive cage;  
then, snap the drive retainer clip into the screw holes on the side of the drive.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
EMC shield  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Tape drive  
Drive retainer clip  
10. Remove the EMC filler.  
11. Push the drive into the bay.  
Note: A tape drive can be installed in bay 1 or bay 2  
12. Connect one end of the applicable signal cable into the rear of the drive and  
make sure that the other end of this cable is connected into the applicable  
connector on the system board.  
13. Route the signal cable so that it does not block the airflow to the rear of the  
drives or over the microprocessor and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).  
14. If you have another drive to install or remove, do so now.  
15. Connect the power cable to the rear of the drive. The connectors are keyed  
and can be inserted only one way.  
Removing a hot-swap hard disk drive  
This procedure applies only to server models that have hot-swap hard disk drives.  
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more  
than 10 minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each drive bay.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To remove a hot-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
Note: You do not have to turn off the server to remove hot-swap drives from  
the hot-swap drive bays.  
3. Rotate the drive tray handle of the drive assembly that is to be removed to the  
open position (based on your model).  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Drive-tray assembly  
Drive tray handle (in open position)  
4. Grasp the handle of the drive assembly that is to be replaced and pull the  
assembly out of the bay.  
5. If you are instructed to return the drive assembly, follow all packaging  
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to  
you.  
IDs for hot-swap hard disk drives  
On some models, the hot-swap-drive backplane controls the IDs of the internal  
hot-swap drive bays. The following table lists the IDs of the hard disk drives and  
backplane that are connected to one channel in the hot-swap models. In the typical  
configuration, the standard hard disk drives and backplane are connected to  
channel A. This table applies only to server models that support four hard disk  
drives.  
50 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 13. IDs of the hot-swap drives (models with four drive bays)  
Drive bay  
ID  
0
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive  
This procedure applies only to server models that have hot-swap hard disk drives.  
Before you install a hot-swap hard disk drive, read the following information:  
v The hot-swap drives must be either all SAS hard disk drives or all SATA hard  
disk drives; the two types cannot be combined.  
v Inspect the drive tray for signs of damage.  
v To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more than 10  
minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each drive bay.  
v You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-swap drives in the hot-swap  
drive bays.  
information.  
To install a hot-swap hard disk drive (based on your model), complete the following  
steps.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted  
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place  
it on a static-protective surface.  
2. Make sure that the drive tray handle is in the open position.  
3. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay; then, carefully slide the  
drive assembly ꢀ1ꢁ into the drive bay until the drive stops.  
4. Rotate the drive tray handle to the closed position ꢀ2ꢁ.  
5. Check the hard disk drive status indicator to make sure that the hard disk drive  
is operating correctly. (You might have to restart the server for the drive to be  
recognized.) If the amber hard disk drive status LED for a drive is lit  
continuously, it indicates that the drive is faulty and must be replaced. If the  
green hard disk drive activity LED is flashing, this indicates that the drive is  
being accessed.  
Note: If the server is configured for RAID operation using a ServeRAID  
controller, you might have to reconfigure the disk arrays after you replace hard  
disk drives. See the ServeRAID documentation for additional information about  
RAID operation.  
6. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 36).  
7. Lock the side cover.  
52 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing a simple-swap hard disk drive  
This procedure applies only to server models that have simple-swap SATA hard disk  
drives.  
Attention: Simple-swap hard disk drives are not hot-swappable. Disconnect all  
power from the server before you remove or install a simple-swap hard disk drive.  
To remove a simple-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
4. Pull the loops of the drive assembly that is to be removed toward each other;  
then, pull the assembly out of the bay.  
5. If you are instructed to return the drive assembly, follow all packaging  
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to  
you.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing a simple-swap hard disk drive  
This procedure applies only to server models that have simple-swap SATA hard disk  
drives.  
Attention: Simple-swap hard disk drives are not hot-swappable. Disconnect all  
power from the server you remove or install a simple-swap hard disk drive.  
To install a simple-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps:  
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted  
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place  
it on a static-protective surface.  
2. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.  
3. Pull the loops of the drive assembly toward each other; then, carefully slide the  
drive assembly into the drive bay until it clicks into place, and release the loops.  
Note: Do not release the loops on the drive assembly until it is completely  
seated.  
4. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 36).  
5. Lock the side cover.  
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Power and signal cables for internal drives  
The server uses cables to connect SATA attached, simple-swap SATA, hot-swap  
SATA and hot-swap SAS devices to the power supply and to the system board.  
system-board connectors.) Review the following information before connecting  
power and signal cables to internal drives:  
54 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v The drives that are preinstalled in the server come with power and signal cables  
attached. If you replace any drives, remember which cable is attached to which  
drive.  
v When you install a drive, make sure that one of the signal cable drive connectors  
is connected to the drive and that the connector at the other end of the signal  
cable is connected to the system board or a compatible adapter or controller that  
you have installed.  
v When you route a cable, make sure that it does not block the airflow to the rear  
of the drives or over the microprocessor or DIMMs.  
The following cables are provided:  
v Power cables: Four-wire power cables connect the drives to the power supply.  
At the ends of these cables are plastic connectors that can be attached to  
different drives; these connectors vary in size. Use either a four-wire power cable  
or SATA power cable with SATA drives, but do not use both at the same time  
(use one or the other).  
v Signal cables: Signal cables are typically flat cables, also called ribbon cables,  
that connect SATA attached, SATA and SAS to the system board. Two or three  
types of signal cables come with the server:  
SATA attached (for optical drives): The flat SATA-attached signal cable has  
two connectors. One of these connectors is attached to the optical drive, and  
one is attached to one of the connectors on the system board.  
Simple-swap SATA: Simple-swap SATA models come with four SATA cables  
that are already connected to the system board and the backplate at the rear  
of the simple-swap drive cage.  
Hot-swap SAS/SATA: Hot-swap SAS/SATA models come with one or two  
(depending on the model) data cables that connect the SAS/SATA controller to  
the hot-swap backplane. The data cable provides inherent connectivity for the  
SAS or SATA drives that the server supports. Therefore, additional cabling is  
not required for these drives.  
For more information about the requirements for SAS/SATA cables and connecting  
SAS/SATA devices, see the documentation that comes with these devices.  
See http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver and click the Options tab for a list of  
supported options.  
Removing an adapter  
To remove an adapter, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
4. Disconnect any cables from the adapter or any cables that impede access to  
the adapter.  
5. Open the rear retention bracket ꢀ1ꢁ.  
6. If you are removing a full-length adapter, press on the retaining tab (two blue  
pull points) on the left side of the front adapter-retention bracket until the  
release lever on the right side of the bracket clicks into place.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Remove the expansion-slot screw ꢀ2ꢁ at the rear of the adapter ꢀ3ꢁ if any.  
8. Carefully grasp the adapter by its top edge or upper corners. And pull the  
adapter from the server.  
Attention: Expansion-slot covers must be installed in all empty slots. This  
maintains the electronic emissions standards of the computer and ensures  
proper ventilation of computer components.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
Rear adapter retention bracket  
Expansion-slot screw (Optional)  
Adapter  
Left side of front adapter retention bracket  
Right side of front adapter retention bracket  
Front adapter retention bracket  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
9. If you are not replacing the adapter, install an expansion-slot cover in the  
expansion-slot opening.  
10. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
56 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing an adapter  
The following notes describe the types of adapters that the server supports and  
other information that you must consider when you install an adapter. Adapter that  
the server supports might vary, depending on your server model.  
v Locate the documentation that comes with the adapter and follow those  
instructions in addition to the instructions in this section. If you must change the  
switch setting or jumper settings on the adapter, follow the instructions that come  
with the adapter.  
v Read the documentation that comes with your operating system.  
v The server comes with the following adapter connectors or slots:  
– Slot 1, PCIe2 x8 (x8, x4, x1) 25W  
– Slot 2, PCIe2 x8 (x8, x4, x1) 25W  
– Slot 3, PCIe2 x1 10W  
– Slot 4, PCI 32bit, 33MHz  
– Slot 5, PCI 32bit, 33MHz  
v Some server models come with a ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA RAID controller  
installed. The ServeRAID-BR10il controller enables integrated RAID levels-0 and  
level-1.  
v You can install full-length adapters that are included in the supported options list  
in slots 1 through 5 (depending on your model).  
v The 32-bit slots 4 and 5 support 5.0 V keyed PCI adapters; they do not support  
3.3 V keyed adapters. Universal adapters are supported in slots 4 and 5 if they  
are universally keyed.  
v The server scans PCI Express Gen 2 x8 (x8) slot 1, PCI Express Gen 2 x8 (x8)  
slot 2, PCI Express Gen 2 x4 (x4) slot 3, and PCI slots 4 and 5 to assign system  
resources. Then, the server starts the PCI devices in the following order, if you  
have not changed the default startup sequence: PCI Express Gen 2 x8 (x8) slot  
1, PCI Express Gen 2 x8 (x8) slot 2, PCI Express Gen 2 x4 (x4) slot 3, PCI slot  
4, and PCI slot 5.  
v See http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver and click the Options tab for a list of  
supported options.  
To install an adapter, complete the following steps.  
Note: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when the  
server is powered-on might cause the server to stop, which might result in the loss  
of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge wrist  
strap or other grounding system when you work inside the server with the power  
on.  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables  
and power cords; then, remove the side cover. See “Removing the side cover”  
3. Follow the cabling instructions, if any, that come with the adapter. Route the  
adapter cables before you install the adapter.  
4. Follow the instructions that come with the adapter to set jumpers or switches, if  
any.  
5. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open position and remove it  
from the server.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Remove the screw that secures the expansion-slot cover to the chassis. Store  
the expansion-slot cover and screw in a safe place for future use.  
Note: Expansion-slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots. This  
maintains the electronic emissions standards of the server and ensures proper  
ventilation of server components.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
Rear adapter retention bracket  
Expansion-slot screw (optional)  
Adapter  
Left side  
Right side  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
Front adapter retention bracket  
7. Touch the static-protective package that contains the adapter to any unpainted  
metal surface on the server. Then, remove the adapter from the  
static-protective package. Avoid touching the components and gold-edge  
connectors on the adapter.  
58 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. If you are installing a full-length adapter, remove the blue adapter guide (if any)  
from the end of the adapter.  
ꢀ1ꢁ Adapter guide  
9. Carefully grasp the adapter by the top edge or upper corners, and align it with  
the expansion slot guides; then, press the adapter firmly into the expansion  
slot. Move the adapter directly from the static-protective package to the  
expansion slot.  
Attention: Make sure that the adapter is correctly seated in the expansion  
slot before you turn on the server. Incomplete installation of an adapter might  
damage the system board or the adapter.  
10. Install an expansion-slot screw at the rear of the adapter.  
11. If you are installing a full-length adapter, press on the release lever on the right  
side of the front adapter-retention bracket to release the retaining tab on the  
left side of the bracket.  
12. Connect required cables to the adapter. Route cables so that they do not block  
the flow of air from the fans.  
13. Reinstall the rear adapter-retention bracket; then, rotate the bracket to the  
closed position.  
Note: If any adapters in the server are large or have heavy cables attached to  
them, you can remove the rear adapter-retention bracket and secure all of the  
adapters with expansion-slot screws.  
If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to  
Removing a PCI card  
To remove a PCI card, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information beginning on page vii, and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and  
all external cables. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on  
3. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.  
4. Disconnect any cables connected to the adapter.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the adapter  
connector, open and close the clips gently.  
5. Carefully grasp the end of the adapter and pull it out of the connector.  
6. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a PCI card  
A PCI card can be installed in either PCI slot 1 or 2 on the system board. The PCI  
card is supported on hot-swap server models only. The PCI card enables integrated  
RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, and 10 support capability on hot-swap hard disk drives. For  
configuration information, see the documentation that comes with the adapter.  
Important: To ensure that your PCI card functions properly on UEFI-based servers,  
make sure that the adapter firmware level is updated and the supporting drivers are  
installed.  
Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.  
To install the PCI card, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords  
and all external cables.  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the PCI card  
connector, open and close the clips gently.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
4. Remove the hard disk drive fan assembly:  
a. Rotate the hard disk drive fan assembly cable out of the system board.  
b. Remove all hard disk drives.  
c. Press and hold the drive cage release tab on the side of the drive cage;  
then, rotate the drive cage out of the chassis until the retaining tab on top  
of the cage locks into place.  
d. Pull out on the hard disk drive fan assembly release tabs (at the blue dots);  
then, rotate the hard disk drive fan assembly away from the drive cage  
slightly.  
5. Disconnect the signal and power cables and the existing SAS/SATA controller  
(if one is installed); then, remove the controller from the server.  
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the PCI card to any  
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the PCI card from the  
package.  
7. Align the PCI card so that the keys align correctly with the connector on the  
system board.  
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the system board or  
the PCI card.  
Note: The drive cage should be in the open position. This illustration shows it  
in the closed position.  
8. Press the PCI card firmly into the connector on the system board.  
60 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Take the other end of the signal cable that is attached to the drive backplane  
section for drive bays 0 through 3 (as labeled on the front of the drive cage)  
and connect it to the connector that is closest to the battery on the PCI card.  
10. Replace the hard disk drive fan assembly:  
a. Insert the hard disk drive fan assembly retaining tab over the right edge of  
the hard disk drive backplane; then, rotate the hard disk drive fan assembly  
toward the backplane. Do not fully close the hard disk drive fan assembly.  
b. Route the signal cables and power cable through the slot on the edge of  
the hard disk drive fan assembly. Make sure that the cables will not be  
pinched between the hard disk drive fan assembly and the hard disk drive  
backplane when the assembly is installed.  
c. Rotate the hard disk drive fan assembly toward the backplane until the  
release tabs are fully engaged and snap into place.  
11. Reconnect the hard disk drive fan assembly cable to the system board.  
12. Rotate the drive cage back into the server until it stops; then, press and hold  
the retaining tab on top of the drive cage while you rotate the drive cage into  
the chassis until it is in the closed position.  
13. Reinstall the hard disk drives.  
Note: Before you continue, check all internal power cables to make sure that  
they are connected to the system board and other optional devices.  
14. Replace the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33). Go to  
15. Lock the side cover.  
16. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device  
To remove the virtual media key, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 32).  
4. Unlock the USB retaining latch by squeezing the two retaining clips toward each  
other. Then, lift up the bracket cover.  
5. Grasp the flash device and pull to remove it from the connector.  
6. Press down on the retaining latch to return it to the original position.  
7. If you are instructed to return the flash device, follow all packaging instructions,  
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device  
To install the virtual media key, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
4. Unlock the USB retaining latch by squeezing the two retaining clips toward  
each other.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Align the flash device with the connector on the system board and push it into  
the connector until it is firmly seated.  
6. Press down on the retaining latch to lock the flash device into the USB  
connector.  
7. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.  
8. Install and lock the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
9. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.  
10. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.  
Removing the virtual media key  
To remove the virtual media key, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then,  
3. Grasp the virtual media key and gently slide it up and off of the mounting tab.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Mounting bracket (feet)  
Mounting tab  
Virtual media key connector  
Virtual media key (front)  
62 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. If you are instructed to return the virtual media key, follow all packaging  
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to  
you.  
Installing the virtual media key  
To install the virtual media key, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 32).  
3. Align the virtual media key with the mounting tab and slide it down the tab onto  
the connector on the system board. Press the virtual media key down into the  
connector until it is firmly seated on the system board.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Mounting bracket (rear)  
Mounting tab  
Virtual media key connector  
Virtual media key (front)  
If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing a hot-swap power supply  
This procedure applies only to server models that have hot-swap power supplies.  
removal of a non-hot-swap power supply.  
When you remove or install a hot-swap power supply, observe the following  
precautions.  
Statement 8:  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following  
label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any  
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside  
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact  
a service technician.  
64 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To remove a hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Disconnect the power cord from the power supply that is to be removed.  
3. Press down on the release lever ꢀ1ꢁ and pull the power supply ꢀ2ꢁ out of the  
bay, using the handle.  
4. If you are instructed to return the power supply, follow all packaging instructions,  
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a hot-swap power supply  
This procedure applies only to server models that have hot-swap power supplies.  
installation of a non-hot-swap power supply.  
To install a hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:  
1. Place the power supply into the bay guides.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Release lever  
Hot-swap power supply  
2. Using the handle, push the power supply toward the front of the chassis until it  
locks into place.  
3. Connect one end of the power cord into the connector on the back of the power  
supply and connect the other end of the power cord into a properly grounded  
electrical outlet.  
4. Make sure that both the ac and dc power LEDs on the rear of the power supply  
are lit, indicating that the power supply is operating correctly.  
Installing a security rope clip  
To help prevent hardware theft, you can add a security rope clip and cable to the  
server. After you add the security cable, make sure that it does not interfere with  
other cables that are connected to the server.  
Before you begin, obtain the following items:  
v A flat-blade screwdriver  
v An adjustable wrench  
v A 19 mm (0.75 in.) rope clip or wire rope (similar to National Manufacturing  
number 3230, stock number 176-735)  
v Threaded nuts that fit the rope clip  
v A security cable  
v A lock, such as a combination lock or padlock  
To install a rope clip ꢀ1ꢁ, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices. Disconnect all external cables and  
power cords.  
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the two metal knockouts.  
3. Insert the rope clip through the rear panel; then, attach and tighten the nuts.  
66 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Thread the cable through the rope clip and around an object that is not part of  
or permanently secured to the building structure or foundation, and from which  
the cable cannot be removed. Fasten the cable ends together with a lock. After  
you add the security cable, make sure that it does not interfere with other  
cables that are connected to the server.  
If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to  
Completing the installation  
To complete the installation, you must reinstall the two-piece bezel, reinstall the side  
cover, connect all the cables and, for some devices, run the Setup utility. Follow the  
instructions in this section.  
Reinstalling the two-piece bezel  
To reinstall the two-piece bezel, complete the following steps:  
1. Install the upper bezel on the front of the server chassis:  
a. Insert the two right-side tabs on the upper bezel into the matching holes on  
the right side of the chassis.  
b. Rotate the upper bezel to the left side of the chassis and press the bezel  
clips into the matching indentations on the left side of the chassis until the  
bezel clips snap into place ꢀ1ꢁ.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
68 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Install the lower bezel:  
a. Insert the two bottom tabs on the lower bezel into the matching holes in the  
front of the chassis.  
b. Rotate the top of the lower bezel up to the chassis; then, press the blue  
release tab on the right side of the lower bezel and completely close the  
lower bezel until it locks securely into place.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reinstalling the side cover  
If you removed the side cover, reinstall it.  
Note: The rear adapter-retention bracket rests against the server side cover. You  
might find it easier to lay the server on its side to replace the side cover.  
To reinstall the side cover, complete the following steps:  
1. Make sure that all cables, adapters, and other components are installed and  
seated correctly and that you have not left loose tools or parts inside the server.  
Also, make sure that all internal cables are correctly routed.  
Note: The cover-release latch ꢀ1ꢁ must be in the unlocked (opened) position  
before you install the side cover.  
2. Position the lip on the bottom edge of the side cover on the ledge on the bottom  
of the chassis; then, rotate the cover up to the chassis, and then press down on  
the cover release latch and push the cover completely closed until it latches  
securely into place.  
3. Press down on the cover-release latch and close the cover to secure it in place.  
4. Lock ꢀ2ꢁ the side cover.  
Note: When you lock the server side cover, it locks both the cover and the  
bezel.  
70 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting the cables  
Attention: To prevent damage to equipment, connect the power cords last.  
If the server cables and connector panel have color-coded connections, match the  
color of the cable end with the color of the connector. For example, match a blue  
cable end with a blue panel connector, a red cable end with a red connector, and  
so on.  
See “Rear view” on page 18 for an illustration of the input/output (I/O) connectors  
on the rear of the server.  
Updating the server configuration  
When you start the server for the first time after you add or remove a device, you  
might receive a message that the configuration has changed. The Setup Utility  
starts automatically so that you can save the new configuration settings. For more  
Some optional devices have device drivers that you must install. For information  
about installing device drivers, see the documentation that comes with each device.  
The server comes with at least one microprocessor. If more than one  
microprocessor is installed, the server can operate as a symmetric multiprocessing  
(SMP) server. You might have to upgrade the operating system to support SMP. For  
more information, see the operating-system documentation.  
If the server has an optional RAID adapter and you have installed or removed a  
hard disk drive, see the documentation that comes with the RAID adapter for  
information about reconfiguring the disk arrays.  
For information about configuring the integrated Gigabit Ethernet controller, see  
Connecting external devices  
If you install a supported optional adapter, you can attach external devices to the  
server.  
To attach an external device, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii, “Installation guidelines” on  
page 29, and the documentation that comes with the device.  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices.  
3. Follow the instructions that come with the device to prepare it for installation  
and to connect it to the server.  
Note: If you are attaching an external device, see the documentation that comes  
with the device for information about cabling.  
Chapter 5. Installing and replacing optional devices 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
72 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units  
Removing the rear system fan  
Attention:  
v Replace a failed fan within 48 hours.  
v To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30  
minutes with the side cover removed.  
To remove the rear system fan, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
2. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 32).  
3. Remove any adapters that impede access to the fan and the fan connector on  
4. Disconnect the fan cable from the system board.  
5. Grasp the fan ꢀ2ꢁ with both hands and pull firmly, extending the rubber  
grommets ꢀ1ꢁ. The grommets will be pulled through the holes in either the fan  
or the chassis and can then be removed.  
6. Pull the fan up and out of the chassis.  
7. If you are instructed to return the fan, follow all packaging instructions, and use  
any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing the rear system fan  
Attention:  
v Replace a failed fan within 48 hours.  
v To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30  
minutes with the side cover removed.  
To install the rear system fan, complete the following steps:  
1. The replacement fan comes with the rubber grommets installed ꢀ1ꢁ; however,  
they might have come out during shipment. If any of the rubber grommets are  
missing from the fan, install them on the fan before you continue. Use  
needle-nosed pliers to pull the grommets through the holes in the fan.  
2. Position the fan ꢀ2ꢁ so that the grommets protrude through the holes in the  
chassis; then, use needle-nosed pliers to pull the grommets through the holes  
from outside the chassis.  
3. Connect the fan cable to the system board (see “System-board internal  
connectors” on page 19 for the location of the rear fan connector).  
4. Install any adapters that you removed (see “Installing an adapter” on page 57).  
5. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
6. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.  
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
74 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing the hard disk drive fan assembly  
This procedure applies only to server models that have a hard disk drive fan  
assembly.  
Attention:  
v Replace a failed fan within 48 hours.  
v To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30  
minutes with the side cover removed.  
To remove the hard disk drive fan assembly, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
4. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.  
5. Disconnect the hard disk drive fan assembly cable from the system board,  
making a note of the cable was connected to the hard disk drive fan connector  
for later installation.  
7. Remove the hard disk drives.  
8. Lift up and hold the drive cage release tab; then, rotate the drive cage out of  
the chassis until the retaining tab on top of the cage locks into place.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Drive cage release tab  
Hard disk drive cage  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Pull out on the hard disk drive fan assembly release tabs; then, rotate the  
assembly away from the drive cage slightly.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
Release tabs  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Hard disk drive fan assembly  
Slot  
10. Remove the cable from the slot on the hard disk drive fan assembly; then,  
rotate the assembly away from the drive cage and remove the assembly from  
the drive cage.  
11. If you are instructed to return the hard disk drive fan assembly, follow all  
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are  
supplied to you.  
Installing the hard disk drive fan assembly  
This procedure applies only to server models that have a hard disk drive fan  
assembly.  
Attention:  
v Replace a failed fan within 48 hours.  
v To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30  
minutes with the side cover removed.  
To install the hard disk drive fan assembly, complete the following steps:  
1. Insert the hard disk drive fan assembly retaining tab over the right edge of the  
hard disk drive backplane; then, rotate the fan assembly toward the backplane.  
Do not fully close the hard disk drive fan assembly.  
76 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Release tabs  
Hard disk drive fan assembly  
Slot  
2. Route the hard disk drive signal and power cables through the slots on the  
edge of the hard disk drive fan assembly. Make sure that the cables will not be  
pinched between the hard disk drive assembly and the hard disk drive  
backplane when the assembly is installed.  
3. Rotate the hard disk drive fan assembly toward the backplane. Align the right  
edge of the hard disk drive fan assembly and the right edge of the backplane.  
Make sure the release tabs are fully engaged on the drive cage.  
4. Rotate the drive cage toward the front of the server until it stops; then, lift and  
hold the retaining tab ꢀ1ꢁ on top of the drive cage while you rotate the drive  
cage into the chassis until it locks into place.  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Connect the hard disk drive fan assembly cable to the system board (see  
“System-board internal connectors” on page 19 for the location of the hard disk  
drive fan connector).  
6. Reinstall the hard disk drives.  
Note: Before you continue, check all internal power cables to be sure that  
they are connected to the system board and other optional devices.  
7. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 36).  
8. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
9. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.  
10. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing the simple-swap backplate  
This procedure applies only to server models with the simple-swap SATA backplate  
installed on the back of the hard disk drive cage.  
To remove the simple-swap backplate, complete the following steps:  
Note: You need a screwdriver in order to complete the steps.  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
5. Remove the simple-swap hard disk drives that are installed in the hard disk  
6. Remove the hard disk drive fan assembly from the hard disk drive cage (see  
7. Disconnect the power cable from the simple-swap backplate.  
8. Disconnect the signal cable from the system board.  
9. Press and hold the drive cage release tab; then, rotate the drive cage out of  
the chassis until the retaining tab on top of the cage locks into place.  
10. Lift up on the retaining latch at the top of the drive cage; then, tilt the top of the  
simple-swap backplate away from the drive cage until it is clear of the locating  
pins.  
78 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
Retaining tab  
Drive cage release tab  
Locating pins  
Simple-swap backplate  
Retaining latch  
11. Lift the simple-swap backplate out of the lower lip on the drive cage and set it  
aside.  
12. If you are instructed to return the simple-swap backplate, follow all packaging  
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to  
you.  
Installing the simple-swap backplate  
This procedure applies only to server models with the simple-swap SATA backplate  
installed on the back of the hard disk drive cage.  
To install the simple-swap backplate, complete the following steps.  
1. Position the bottom edge of the simple-swap backplate on the lower lip of the  
drive cage.  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
Retaining tab  
Drive cage release tab  
Locating pins  
Simple-swap backplate  
Retaining latch  
2. Tilt the top of the simple-swap backplate toward the drive cage and over the  
locating pins until the retaining latch is engaged securely.  
3. Press and hold the retaining tab on top of the cage; then, rotate the drive cage  
into the chassis until it locks into place.  
4. Connect the signal cables to the system board (see “System-board internal  
connectors” on page 19 for the location of the Serial ATA drive connectors).  
5. Connect the power cables to the simple-swap backplate.  
6. Install the hard disk drive fan assembly on the hard disk drive cage (see  
7. Install the simple-swap hard disk drives that you removed from the hard disk  
8. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 36).  
9. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
10. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.  
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
80 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane  
This procedure applies only to hot-swap server models with a SAS/SATA hard disk  
drive backplane installed on the back of the hard disk drive cage.  
To remove the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
5. Remove the hot-swap SAS/SATA hard disk drives installed in the hard disk  
6. Remove the hard disk drive fan assembly from the hard disk drive cage (see  
7. Disconnect the power and signal cables from the hard disk drive backplane.  
8. Press and hold the drive cage release tab; then, rotate the drive cage out of  
the chassis until the retaining tab on top of the cage locks into place.  
9. Remove the two screws that secure the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane  
to the drive cage.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Locating pins  
Retaining tab  
Retaining latch  
Drive cage release tab  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10. Tilt the top of the hard disk drive backplane away from the drive cage until it is  
clear of the locating pins.  
11. Lift the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane out of the lower lip on the drive  
cage and set it aside.  
12. If you are instructed to return the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane, follow  
all packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that  
are supplied to you.  
Installing the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane  
This procedure applies only to hot-swap server models with a SAS/SATA hard disk  
drive backplane installed on the back of the hard disk drive cage.  
To install the hard disk drive backplane, complete the following steps:  
1. Place the bottom edge of the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane in the lower  
lip of the drive cage.  
2. Tilt the top of the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane toward the drive cage  
and over the locating pins.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Locating pins  
Retaining tab  
Retaining latch  
Drive cage release tab  
3. Install the two screws that secure the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane to  
the drive cage.  
4. Press and hold the retaining tab on top of the cage; then, rotate the drive cage  
into the chassis until it locks into place.  
5. Connect the power and signal cables to the hard disk drive backplane.  
82 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Install the hard disk drive fan assembly onto the hard disk drive cage (see  
7. Install the hot-swap hard disk drives that you removed from the hard disk drive  
8. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 36).  
9. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
10. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.  
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing the front-panel assembly  
To remove the front-panel assembly, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 32).  
4. Remove the lower bezel, and then remove the upper bezel (see “Removing the  
5. Slide the drives in bay 1 and bay 2 forward slightly (see “Removing a DVD  
drive” on page 44 for more information). It is not necessary to remove these  
drives.  
6. If the server has hot-swap power supplies, remove the power supplies and the  
7. Disconnect the front-panel assembly cable from the system board, and note the  
routing of the cable (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 19 for the  
location of the front-panel connector).  
8. Press up on the release tab of the front-panel assembly ꢀ1ꢁ and pull the  
assembly toward the rear of the server; then, remove the front-panel assembly  
from the chassis.  
9. If you are instructed to return the front-panel assembly, follow all packaging  
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to  
you.  
Installing the front-panel assembly  
To install the front-panel assembly, complete the following steps:  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Position the front end of the front-panel assembly in the channel above drive  
bay 1 on the left side of the chassis.  
2. Push the front-panel assembly ꢀ1ꢁ toward the front of the chassis until it clicks  
into place.  
3. Reroute and connect the front-panel assembly cable to the system board (see  
front-panel connector).  
4. If the server has hot-swap power supplies, install the power-supply cage and  
5. Push the drives in bay 1 and bay 2 into the drive bays (see “Installing a DVD  
drive” on page 45 for more information).  
6. Install the upper bezel (see “Installing the upper bezel” on page 37).  
7. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 36).  
8. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
9. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.  
10. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing the front USB connector assembly  
To remove the front USB connector assembly, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 32).  
4. Remove the lower bezel, and then remove the upper bezel (see “Removing the  
5. Disconnect the front USB cable from the system board, and note the routing of  
the cable (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 19 for the location of  
the front USB connector).  
6. Press down and hold the release tab on the top of the front USB housing; then,  
tilt the top of the housing away from the chassis and lift the housing out of the  
opening in the chassis.  
84 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Squeeze the spring clips ꢀ1ꢁ on the sides of the front USB connector assembly  
and pull the assembly out of the back of the housing.  
8. Carefully pull the front USB cable out of the opening in the chassis.  
9. If you are instructed to return the front USB connector assembly, follow all  
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are  
supplied to you.  
Installing the front USB connector assembly  
To install the front USB connector assembly, complete the following steps:  
1. Carefully insert the front USB cable through the opening in the front of the  
chassis.  
2. Squeeze the spring clips ꢀ1ꢁ on the sides of the front USB connector assembly  
and insert the assembly into the housing through the back of the housing.  
3. Place the bottom edge of the housing into the bottom of the opening in the  
chassis; then, tilt the top of the housing into position until it clicks into place.  
4. Reroute and connect the front USB cable to the front USB connector on the  
location of the front USB connector).  
5. Install the upper bezel (see “Installing the upper bezel” on page 37).  
6. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 36).  
7. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
8. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing the rear adapter retention bracket  
To remove the rear adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
2. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 32).  
3. Remove all adapters (if necessary) and place the adapters on static-protective  
surface.  
Note: You might find it helpful to note where each adapter is installed before  
you remove the adapters.  
4. Release the rear adapter-retention bracket by lifting up on the rear  
adapter-retention bracket, and rotate the bracket partially toward the closed  
position.  
5. Grasp the bracket on one side at the hinge point and pull inward (while you  
rotate the bracket slightly toward the front of the server) until the bracket ꢀ1ꢁ is  
free of the hinge pin ꢀ2ꢁ; then, grasp the bracket on the other side at the hinge  
point, pull inward until the bracket is free of the hinge pin, and remove the rear  
adapter-retention bracket from the server.  
Installing the rear adapter retention bracket  
To install the rear adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:  
1. Position the rear adapter retention bracket so that the hole in one of the hinge  
points is aligned with the hinge pin on the chassis; then, place the hinge pin  
through the hole on the chassis.  
2. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket into place so that the hole in the  
opposite hinge point snaps into place over the hinge pin on the chassis.  
3. Install the adapters.  
4. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
5. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.  
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
86 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing the front adapter-retention bracket  
To remove the front adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 32).  
4. Open the front and rear adapter-retention brackets.  
5. Remove all adapters (if necessary) and place them on a static-protective  
surface.  
Note: You might find it helpful to note where each adapter is installed before  
you remove the adapters.  
6. Grasp one side of the bracket at a hinge point and pull outward (while you  
rotate the bracket slightly toward the rear of the server) until the hinge pin on  
the bracket is free of the hole; then, grasp the bracket on the other side at the  
hinge point, pull outward until the bracket is free of the hinge pin, and remove  
the rear adapter-retention bracket from the server.  
Installing the front adapter-retention bracket  
To install the front adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:  
1. Insert one of the hinge pins on the front adapter-retention bracket into the metal  
hinge point on the fan cage assembly.  
2. Rotate the other hinge pin on the front adapter-retention bracket into position  
and push the hinge pin into the other metal hinge point. The hinge pin will  
protrude through the hole in the metal hinge point when the adapter-retention  
bracket is seated correctly.  
3. Reinstall any adapters that you removed earlier.  
4. Close the front and rear adapter retention brackets.  
5. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
6. Lock the side cover.  
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing the hot-swap power supply cage  
This procedure applies only to server models that have hot-swap power-supplies.  
To remove the power-supply cage, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 32).  
4. Remove the hot-swap power supplies (see “Removing a non-hot-swap power  
Note: It might be helpful to lay the server on its side for the remainder of this  
procedure.  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Disconnect the cables from the power-supply cage to the system board and all  
internal components.  
6. Remove the four black screws that secure the power-supply cage to the  
chassis; then, slide the cage toward the front of the server to disengage the  
retaining clips ꢀ1ꢁ from the top of the chassis and lift the cage out of the  
chassis.  
7. If you are instructed to return the power-supply cage, follow all packaging  
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to  
you.  
Installing the hot-swap power supply cage  
This procedure applies only to server models that have hot-swap power-supplies.  
To install the hot-swap power supply cage, complete the following steps:  
1. Place the power-supply cage into the chassis and slide it toward the rear of the  
server until the retaining clips ꢀ1ꢁ engage the top of the chassis.  
88 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Install the four screws that secure the power-supply cage to the chassis.  
3. Connect the cables from the power-supply cage to the system board and all  
internal components (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 19 for the  
locations of the internal connectors).  
4. Reinstall both hot-swap power supplies (see “Removing the hot-swap power  
5. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
6. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.  
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing the battery  
To remove the battery, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Handling  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices.  
3. Disconnect all external cables and power cords.  
4. Turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the side cover facing up.  
5. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
6. Locate the battery on the system board (see “System-board internal connectors”  
7. Remove the battery:  
a. Use one finger to push the battery horizontally out of its socket, pushing it  
away from the socket.  
b. Lift and remove the battery from the socket.  
8. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
Installing the battery  
The following notes describe information that you must consider when you replace  
the battery in the server:  
v You must replace the battery with a lithium battery of the same type from the  
same manufacturer.  
v After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure the server and reset the  
system date and time.  
v To avoid possible danger, read and follow the following safety statement.  
Statement 2:  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only Part Number 33F8354 or an  
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has  
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module  
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can  
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.  
Do not:  
v Throw or immerse into water  
v Heat to more than 100° C (212° F)  
v Repair or disassemble  
To install the replacement battery, do the following:  
1. Follow any special handling and installation instructions that come with the  
replacement battery.  
2. Insert the replacement battery ꢀ1ꢁ:  
a. Hold the battery in a vertical orientation so that the smaller side is facing the  
socket.  
b. Place the battery into its socket, and press the battery towards the socket  
until it clicks into place. Make sure that the battery clip holds the battery  
securely.  
3. Install and lock the left-side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
4. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Note: You must wait approximately 2 1/2 minutes after you connect the server  
power cord to an electrical outlet before the power-control button becomes  
active.  
5. Start the Setup Utility and reset the configuration:  
v Set the system date and time.  
v Set the power-on password.  
v Reconfigure the server.  
Removing and replacing FRUs  
Field replaceable units (FRUs) must be installed only by trained service technicians.  
90 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing a ServeRAID BR10-il controller  
To remove the ServeRAID BR10-il controller, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you lose the  
ability to view the LEDs because the LEDs are not lit when the power source is  
removed. Before you disconnect the power source, make a note of which LEDs  
are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operation information panel and  
LEDs inside the server on the system board.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 32).  
4. Open the rear adapter-retention bracket until the release lever on the right side  
of the bracket clicks into place.  
5. Squeeze the tabs on both sides of the connector on the signal cable and  
remove the cable from the SAS/SATA controller.  
6. Carefully disengage the tabs on each side of the SAS/SATA controller connector  
and the front of the SAS/SATA controller from the plastic standoff.  
7. Grasp the edges of the SAS/SATA controller and pull it out of the connector. If  
the standoff comes away from the system board with the controller, gently pull it  
out of the controller and push it back into the hole on the system board.  
8. If you are instructed to return the SAS/SATA controller, follow all packaging  
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to  
you.  
Installing a ServeRAID BR10-il controller  
To install the SAS/SATA RAID controller, complete the following steps:  
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the SAS/SATA controller to  
any unpainted surface on the outside of the server; then, remove the SAS/SATA  
controller from the package.  
2. Position the SAS/SATA controller over the connector and the plastic standoff;  
then, press the SAS/SATA controller firmly into the connector and onto the  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
plastic standoff.  
3. Connect the signal cable to the SAS/SATA controller.  
4. Install and lock the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
5. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing an optional ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller  
To remove a ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA adapter, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information beginning on page vii, and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and  
all external cables. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on  
3. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.  
4. Disconnect any cables connected to the adapter.  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the  
ServeRAID-MR10i adapter connector, open and close the clips gently.  
5. Carefully grasp the end of the ServeRAID adapter and pull it out of the  
connector.  
6. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing an optional ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller  
The optional IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller can be installed in either  
PCI slot 1 or slot 2 on the system board. The ServeRAID-MR10i adapter is  
supported on hot-swap server models only. The IBM ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA  
adapter enables integrated RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, and 10 support capability on  
hot-swap hard disk drives. For configuration information, see the documentation on  
the ServeRAID CD that comes with the adapter.  
Important: To ensure that any of your ServeRAID 10i, 10is, or 10M adapters  
function properly on UEFI-based servers, make sure that the adapter firmware level  
is updated to at least 11.xx-XXX, and the supporting drivers.  
92 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.  
To install a ServeRAID-MR10i adapter, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information beginning on page vii, and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Touch the static-protective package containing the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter to  
any unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the ServeRAID-MR10i  
adapter from the package.  
3. If the battery pack (battery carrier and battery) did not come installed on the  
ServeRAID adapter, install the battery pack.  
a. Align the battery carrier pins and the connector for the battery carrier with  
the pin holes and connector on the ServeRAID adapter; then, lower the  
battery carrier onto the ServeRAID adapter.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Battery  
Battery carrier  
RAID adapter  
Connector for battery carrier  
b. Press the battery carrier into the connector on the ServeRAID adapter until it  
is firmly connected.  
c. Secure the battery carrier to the ServeRAID adapter with the screws that  
came with the battery pack.  
4. Open the rear retention bracket.  
5. Turn the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter so that the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter keys  
align correctly with the connector.  
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the system board or  
the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter.  
6. Take the signal cable that is attached to the drive backplane and connect it to  
the ServeRAID adapter.  
Note: When you restart the server, you are prompted to import the existing  
RAID configuration to the new ServeRAID adapter.  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Press the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter firmly into the connector on the system  
board.  
8. Reconnect the cables to the new ServeRAID-MR10i adapter.  
Removing an optional ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller  
To remove a ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA adapter, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information beginning on page vii, and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and  
all external cables. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on  
3. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.  
4. Open the rear retention bracket.  
5. Disconnect any cables connected to the adapter.  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the  
ServeRAID-MR10is adapter connector, open and close the clips gently.  
6. Carefully grasp the end of the ServeRAID adapter and pull it out of the  
connector.  
7. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing an optional ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA Controller  
The optional IBM ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller can be installed  
in either PCI slot 1 or slot 2 on the system board. The ServeRAID-MR10is adapter  
is supported on hot-swap server models only. The erveRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA  
adapter with an encryption 1078 DE chip set enables integrated RAID levels 0, 1, 5,  
6, and 10 support capability on hot-swap hard disk drives. For configuration  
information, see the documentation on the ServeRAID CD that comes with the  
adapter.  
Important: To ensure that any of your ServeRAID 10i, 10is, or 10M adapters  
function properly on UEFI-based servers, make sure that the adapter firmware level  
is updated to at least 11.xx-XXX, and the supporting drivers.  
Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.  
To install the optional ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA adapter, complete the  
following steps:  
1. Read the safety information beginning on page vii, and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Touch the static-protective package containing the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter  
to any unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the  
ServeRAID-MR10is adapter from the package.  
3. If the battery pack (battery carrier and battery) did not come installed on the  
ServeRAID adapter, install the battery pack.  
a. Align the battery carrier pins and the connector for the battery carrier with  
the pin holes and connector on the ServeRAID adapter; then, lower the  
battery carrier onto the ServeRAID adapter.  
94 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Battery  
Battery carrier  
RAID adapter  
Connector for battery carrier  
b. Press the battery carrier into the connector on the ServeRAID adapter until  
it is firmly connected.  
c. Secure the battery carrier to the ServeRAID adapter with the screws that  
came with the battery pack.  
4. Turn the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter so that the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter  
keys align correctly with the connector.  
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the system board or  
the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ServeRAID-MR10is  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
PCI slot  
5. Press the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter firmly into the connector on the system  
board.  
6. Reconnect the cables to the new ServeRAID-MR10is adapter. Make sure that  
the ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA adapter is cabled.  
7. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the closed (locked) position.  
8. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
9. Lock the side cover.  
10. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing a non-hot-swap power supply  
This procedure applies only to server models that have a non-hot-swap power  
information about the removal of a hot-swap power supply.  
When you remove or install a non-hot-swap power supply, observe the following  
precautions.  
Statement 8:  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following  
label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any  
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside  
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact  
a service technician.  
96 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To remove a non-hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 32).  
Note: It might be helpful to lay the server on its side for the remainder of this  
procedure.  
4. Disconnect the cables from the power supply to the system board and all  
internal components.  
Attention: Support the power supply while you remove the mounting screws.  
After the screws are removed, the power supply is loose and can damage other  
components in the server.  
5. While you support the power supply, remove the four screws that secure it to  
the chassis; then, lift the power supply out of the chassis. Save the screws to  
use when you install the replacement power supply.  
6. If you are instructed to return the power supply, follow all packaging instructions,  
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a non-hot-swap power supply  
This procedure applies only to server models that have a non-hot-swap power  
information about the installation of a hot-swap power supply.  
To install a non-hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:  
1. Position the power supply in the chassis so that the screw holes in the power  
supply are aligned with the corresponding holes in the rear of the chassis.  
2. Install the four screws that secure the power supply to the chassis.  
3. Connect the cables from the power supply to the system board and all internal  
locations of the internal connectors).  
4. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
5. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.  
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
98 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing the microprocessor and fan sink  
To remove the microprocessor and fan sink, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing up.  
4. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
6. Remove the hard disk drives.  
7. Press and hold the drive cage release tab; then, rotate the drive cage out of  
the chassis until the retaining tab on top of the cage locks into place.  
8. Disconnect any cables that impede access to the fan sink and microprocessor.  
Attention: The fan-sink retention lever is spring-loaded when the fan sink is  
in place. Releasing the lever too quickly or allowing it to spring upward can  
damage the fan sink and surrounding components.  
9. Remove the fan sink from the microprocessor:  
a. Disconnect the fan-sink cable from the system board.  
b. Release the fan-sink retention lever by pressing down on the end, moving  
it to the side and slowly releasing it to the open (up) position.  
Important: Be careful when you handle the microprocessor and fan sink.  
If the microprocessor and fan sink will be reused, do not contaminate the  
thermal material between them.  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
c. Tip the top of the fan sink toward the front of the server while you slide it  
away from the lower flange of the retention module; then, remove it from  
the server. After removal, place the fan sink on its side on a clean, flat  
surface.  
Attention: The microprocessor retention latch is spring-loaded when the  
microprocessor is in place. Releasing the latch too quickly or allowing it to  
spring upward can damage the microprocessor and surrounding components.  
10. Release the microprocessor retention latch by pressing down on the end,  
moving it to the side, and slowly releasing it to the open (up) position.  
11. Open the microprocessor bracket frame by lifting up the tab on the top edge.  
12. Carefully lift the microprocessor straight up and out of the socket, and place it  
on a static-protective surface.  
13. If you are instructed to return the microprocessor and fan sink, follow all  
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are  
supplied to you.  
100 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a microprocessor and fan sink  
To install the microprocessor, complete the following steps:  
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the microprocessor to any  
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the microprocessor from  
the package.  
2. Remove the protective cover, tape, or label from the surface of the  
microprocessor socket, if any is present.  
3. Rotate the release lever on the microprocessor socket to the fully open  
position.  
Attention: Make sure that the release lever on the microprocessor socket is  
in the fully open position before you insert the microprocessor in the socket.  
Failure to do so might result in permanent damage to the microprocessor,  
microprocessor socket, and system board.  
4. Carefully grasp the microprocessor and place the microprocessor into the  
microprocessor socket.  
Note: To maintain correct orientation between the microprocessor and the  
microprocessor socket during installation, observe the following information:  
v The microprocessor has two notches that are keyed to two tabs on the  
sides of the socket.  
v A triangle-shaped indicator on one corner of the microprocessor points to a  
45-degree angle on one corner of the socket.  
v Do not use excessive force when you press the microprocessor into the  
socket.  
5. Close the microprocessor bracket frame; then, close the microprocessor  
retention latch and lock it securely in place.  
6. Install the fan sink:  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
a. Make sure that the fan sink retention lever is in the fully open position.  
Important: Be careful when you handle the microprocessor and fan sink.  
Do not contaminate the thermal material between them.  
b. Slide the bottom edge of the fan sink under the lower flange of the  
retention module; then, place the top of the fan sink onto the top of the  
retention module.  
c. Close the fan sink retention lever and lock it securely in place.  
d. Reconnect the fan sink cable to the system board (see “System-board  
internal connectors” on page 19 for the location of the fan-sink connector).  
7. Reconnect any cables that you disconnected during the removal of the old  
microprocessor.  
8. Rotate the drive cage toward the front of the server until it stops; then, lift and  
hold the retaining tab on top of the drive cage while you rotate the drive cage  
into the chassis until it locks into place.  
9. Reinstall the hard disk drives.  
10. Install the lower bezel (see “Installing the lower bezel” on page 36).  
11. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
12. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.  
13. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Thermal grease  
The thermal grease must be replaced whenever the fan sink has been removed  
from the top of the microprocessor and is going to be reused or when debris is  
found in the grease.  
When you are installing the fan sink on the same microprocessor that is was  
removed from, make sure that:  
v The thermal grease on the fan sink and microprocessor is not contaminated.  
v Additional thermal grease is not added to the existing thermal grease on the fan  
sink and microprocessor.  
102 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note:  
v Read the Safety information on page vii.  
To replace damaged or contaminated thermal grease on the microprocessor and  
fan sink, complete the following steps:  
1. Place the fan sink on a clean work surface.  
2. Remove the cleaning pad from its package and unfold it completely.  
3. Use the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the bottom of the fan  
sink.  
Note: Make sure that all of the thermal grease is removed.  
4. Use a clean area of the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the  
microprocessor; then, dispose of the cleaning pad after all of the thermal grease  
is removed.  
5. Use the thermal-grease syringe to place 9 uniformly spaced dots of 0.02 mL  
each on the top of the microprocessor. The outermost dots must be within  
approximately 5 mm of the edge of the microprocessor, this is to ensure uniform  
distribution of the grease.  
Note: If the grease is properly applied, approximately half of the grease will  
remain in the syringe.  
6. Install the fan sink onto the microprocessor as described in “Installing a  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the system board  
To remove the system board, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and “Installation guidelines”  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing up.  
4. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
5. Note where each cable is connected; then, disconnect all cables from the  
system board.  
6. Press and hold the drive cage release tab; then, rotate the drive cage out of  
the chassis until the retaining tab on top of the cage locks into place.  
7. Remove any of the following components (in addition to others that might not  
be listed) that are installed on the system board and put them in a safe,  
static-protective place:  
v Microprocessor and fan sink (see “Removing the microprocessor and fan  
v The fan connector covers.  
8. Remove the four screws that secure the fan sink retention module and fan sink  
mounting bracket to the system board; then, set the fan sink retention module,  
fan sink mounting bracket, and screws aside for use later.  
Note: Make sure that you observe the orientation of the fan sink retention  
module before you move it so that when you reinstall it, you install it in the  
same orientation.  
104 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Remove the eight screws (seven in front and one in rear) ꢀ1ꢁ that secure the  
system board to the chassis.  
10. Slide the system board toward the front of the server to disengage the tabs on  
the fan sink mounting bracket from the slots on the bottom of the chassis;  
then, carefully lift the system board out of the server.  
11. Remove the fan connector covers from fan connectors 1, 3, and 5 on the  
system board. Then, put the fan connector covers aside for use later.  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. If you are instructed to return the system board, follow all packaging  
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to  
you.  
Installing the system board  
To install the system board, complete the following steps:  
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the system board to any  
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the system board from  
the package.  
2. Install the fan connector covers onto fan connectors 1, 3, and 5 on the system  
board.  
3. Place the fan sink mounting bracket underneath the system board and align  
the holes on fan sink mounting bracket with the four screw holes for the fan  
sink retention module slot on system board. Place the fan sink retention  
module on top of the system board and align it with the four screw holes for  
the fan sink retention module slot (make sure that the fan sink retention  
module orientation of the is correct). Take the four screws that you removed  
earlier and secure the fan sink mounting bracket and the fan sink retention  
module to the system board.  
4. Insert the system board into the chassis and slide it toward the rear of the  
server until the tabs on the fan sink mounting bracket is fully engaged in the  
holes for fan sink mounting bracket slots on the bottom the chassis.  
Note: The tabs are fully engaged when the screw holes in the system board  
are aligned with the corresponding holes in the chassis.  
106 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Install the eight screws (seven in front and one in rear) that secure the system  
board to the chassis.  
6. Install any of the following components that you removed from the system  
board:  
v The fan connector covers.  
v Microprocessor and fan sink (see “Installing a microprocessor and fan sink”  
7. Press and hold the retaining tab on top of the cage; then, rotate the drive cage  
into the chassis until it locks into place.  
8. Reconnect any cables to the system board that you disconnected during  
removal.  
9. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 33).  
10. Lock the side cover if you unlocked it during removal.  
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Chapter 6. Installing and replacing customer replaceable units 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. Configuring the server  
The following configuration programs come with the server:  
v Setup Utility  
The Setup Utility (formerly called the Configuration/Setup Utility program) is part  
of the server firmware. Use it to change the startup-device sequence, set the  
date and time, and set passwords. For information about using this program, see  
v Boot Menu program  
The Boot Menu program is part of the server firmware. Use it to override the  
startup sequence that is set in the Setup Utility and temporarily assign a device  
to be first in the startup sequence.  
v Integrated management module  
Use the integrated management module (IMM) for configuration, to update the  
firmware and sensor data record/field replaceable unit (SDR/FRU) data, and to  
remotely manage a network. For information about using the IMM, see “Using the  
v Remote presence capability and blue-screen capture  
The remote presence and blue-screen capture feature are integrated into the  
integrated management module (IMM). These features allow you to access the  
network remotely and to mount or unmount drives or images on the client  
system. For more information about how to enable the remote presence function,  
v Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program  
Use this program as an alternative to the Setup Utility for modifying UEFI settings  
and IMM settings. Use the ASU program online or out-of-band to modify UEFI  
settings from the command line without the need to restart the server to access  
the Setup Utility. For more information about using this program, see “Advanced  
v Ethernet controller configuration  
For information about configuring the Ethernet controller, see “Configuring the  
v LSI Configuration Utility program  
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure the integrated SAS/SATA  
controller with RAID capabilities and the devices that are attached to it. For  
information about using this program, see “Using LSI Configuration Utility  
The following table lists the different server configurations and the applications  
that are available for configuring and managing RAID arrays.  
Table 14. Server configurations and applications for configuring and managing RAID arrays  
RAID array configuration  
RAID array management  
(before operating system is (after operating system is  
Server configuration  
installed)  
installed)  
ServeRAID BR10il v2  
LSI Utility (invoked from the  
Setup Utility)  
MegaRAID Storage Manager  
(for monitoring storage only)  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 14. Server configurations and applications for configuring and managing RAID  
arrays (continued)  
RAID array configuration  
(before operating system is (after operating system is  
installed) installed)  
RAID array management  
Server configuration  
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA MegaRAID Storage Manager MegaRAID Storage Manager  
Controller (LSI 1078)  
installed  
(MSM), MegaRAID BIOS  
Configuration Utility (press C  
to start)  
(MSM)  
Using the Setup Utility  
Use the Setup Utility, formerly called the Configuration/Setup Utility program, to  
perform the following tasks:  
v View configuration information  
v View and change assignments for devices and I/O ports  
v Set the date and time  
v Set the startup characteristics of the server and the order of startup devices  
v Set and change settings for advanced hardware features  
v View, set, and change settings for power-management features  
v View and clear error logs  
v Resolve configuration conflicts  
Starting the Setup Utility  
To start the Setup Utility, do the following:  
1. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the  
power-control button becomes active.  
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an  
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the  
full Setup Utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a limited  
Setup Utility menu is available.  
3. Select the settings to view or change.  
Setup Utility menu choices  
The following choices are on the Setup Utility main menu. Depending on the  
version of the firmware, some menu choices might differ slightly from these  
descriptions.  
v System Information  
Select this choice to view information about the server. When you make changes  
through other choices in the Setup Utility, some of those changes are reflected in  
the system information; you cannot change settings directly in the system  
information.  
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
System Summary  
Select this choice to view configuration information, including the ID, speed,  
and cache size of the microprocessors, machine type and model of the server,  
the serial number, the system UUID, and the amount of installed memory.  
When you make configuration changes through other choices in the Setup  
110 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Utility, the changes are reflected in the system summary; you cannot change  
settings directly in the system summary.  
Product Data  
Select this choice to view the system-board identifier, the revision level or  
issue date of the firmware, the integrated management module and  
diagnostics code, and the version and date.  
v System Settings  
Select this choice to view or change the server component settings.  
Processors  
Select this choice to view or change the processor settings.  
Memory  
Select this choice to view or change the memory settings. To configure  
memory mirroring, select System Settings Memory, and then select  
Memory Channel Mode Mirroring.  
Devices and I/O Ports  
Select this choice to view or change assignments for devices and input/output  
(I/O) ports. You can configure the serial ports; configure remote console  
redirection; enable or disable integrated Ethernet controllers, the SAS/SATA  
controller, SATA optical drive channels, and PCI slots. If you disable a device,  
it cannot be configured, and the operating system will not be able to detect it  
(this is equivalent to disconnecting the device).  
Power  
Select this choice to view or change power capping to control consumption,  
processors, and performance states.  
Legacy Support  
Select this choice to view or set legacy support.  
- Force Legacy Video on Boot  
Select this choice to force INT video support, if the operating system does  
not support UEFI video output standards.  
- Rehook INT 19h  
Select this choice to enable or disable devices from taking control of the  
boot process. The default is Disable.  
- Legacy Thunk Support  
Select this choice to enable or disable the UEFI to interact with PCI mass  
storage devices that are not UEFI-compliant.  
Integrated Management Module  
Select this choice to view or change the settings for the integrated  
management module.  
- POST Watchdog Timer  
Select this choice to view or enable the POST watchdog timer.  
- POST Watchdog Timer Value  
Select this choice to view or set the POST loader watchdog timer value.  
- Reboot System on NMI  
Enable or disable restarting the system whenever a nonmaskable interrupt  
(NMI) occurs. Enabled is the default.  
- Commands on USB Interface Preference  
Select this choice to enable or disable the Ethernet over USB interface on  
IMM.  
Chapter 7. Configuring the server 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- Network Configuration  
Select this choice to view the system management network interface port,  
the IMM MAC address, the current IMM IP address, and host name; define  
the static IMM IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address; specify  
whether to use the static IP address or have DHCP assign the IMM IP  
address; save the network changes.  
- Reset IMM to Defaults  
Select this choice to view or reset IMM to the default settings.  
Adapters and UEFI Drivers  
Select this choice to view information about the adapters and drivers in the  
server that are compliant with UEFI 1.10 and UEFI 2.0.  
v Network  
Select this choice to view or configure the network options, such as the iSCSI,  
PXE, and network devices. There might be additional configuration choices for  
optional network devices that are compliant with UEFI 2.1 and later.  
v Date and Time  
Select this choice to set the date and time in the server, in 24-hour format  
(hour:minute:second).  
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
v Start Options  
Select this choice to view or boot to devices, including the startup sequence.  
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
v Boot Manager  
Select this choice to view, add, delete, or change the device boot priority, boot  
from a file, select a one-time boot, or reset the boot order to the default setting. If  
the server has Wake on LAN hardware and software and the operating system  
supports Wake on LAN functions, you can specify a startup sequence for the  
WAKE on LAN functions. For example, you can define a startup sequence that  
checks for media in a CD-RW/DVD drive, then checks the hard disk drive, and  
then the network adapter.  
v System Event Logs  
Select this choice to enter the System Event Manager, where you can view the  
error messages in the system-event logs. You can use the arrow keys to move  
between pages in the error log.  
The system-event logs contain all event and error messages that have been  
generated during POST, by the systems-management interface handler, and by  
the system service processor. Run the diagnostic programs to get more  
information about error codes that occur. See the Hardware Maintenance Manual  
for instructions for running the diagnostic programs.  
Important: If the system-error LED on the front of the server is lit but there are  
no other error indications, clear the system-event log. Also, after you complete a  
repair or correct an error, clear the system-event log to turn off the system-error  
LED on the front of the server.  
POST Event Viewer  
Select this choice to enter the POST event viewer to view the error messages  
in the POST event log.  
System Event Log  
Select this choice to view the error messages in the system-event log.  
Clear System Event Log  
Select this choice to clear the system-event log.  
112 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v User Security  
Select this choice to set, change, or clear passwords. See “Passwords” for more  
information.  
This choice is on the full and limited Setup Utility menu.  
Set Power-on Password  
Select this choice to set or change a power-on password. For more  
Clear Power-on Password  
Select this choice to clear a power-on password. For more information, see  
Set Administrator Password  
Select this choice to set or change an administrator password. An  
administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it  
limits access to the full Setup Utility menu. If an administrator password is set,  
the full Setup Utility menu is available only if you type the administrator  
password at the password prompt. For more information, see “Administrator  
Clear Administrator Password  
Select this choice to clear an administrator password. For more information,  
v Save Settings  
Select this choice to save the changes that you have made in the settings.  
v Restore Settings  
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and  
restore the previous settings.  
v Load Default Settings  
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and  
restore the factory settings.  
v Exit Setup  
Select this choice to exit from the Setup Utility. If you have not saved the  
changes that you have made in the settings, you are asked whether you want to  
save the changes or exit without saving them.  
Passwords  
From the User Security menu choice, you can set, change, and delete a power-on  
password and an administrator password. The User Security choice is on the full  
Setup Utility menu only.  
If you set only a power-on password, you must type the power-on password to  
complete the system startup and to have access to the full Setup Utility menu.  
An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it  
limits access to the full Setup Utility menu. If you set only an administrator  
password, you do not have to type a password to complete the system startup, but  
you must type the administrator password to access the Setup Utility menu.  
If you set a power-on password for a user and an administrator password for a  
system administrator, you can type either password to complete the system startup.  
A system administrator who types the administrator password has access to the full  
Setup Utility menu; the system administrator can give the user authority to set,  
change, and delete the power-on password. A user who types the power-on  
Chapter 7. Configuring the server 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
password has access to only the limited Setup Utility menu; the user can set,  
change, and delete the power-on password, if the system administrator has given  
the user that authority.  
Power-on password  
If a power-on password is set, when you turn on the server, the system startup will  
not be completed until you type the power-on password. You can use any  
combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and - 9) for the password.  
If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the server in the  
following way:  
v If an administrator password is set, type the administrator password at the  
password prompt. Start the Setup utility and reset the power-on password.  
Administrator password  
An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it  
limits access to the full Setup utility menu. You can use any combination of up to  
seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and 0 - 9) for the password.  
Using the Boot Manager program  
The Boot Manager program is a built-in, menu-driven configuration utility program  
that you can use to temporarily redefine the first startup device without changing  
settings in the Setup utility.  
To use the Boot Manager program, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn off the server.  
2. Restart the server.  
3. When the prompt <F12> Select Boot Device is displayed, press F12. If a  
bootable USB mass storage device is installed, a submenu item (USB  
Key/Disk) is displayed.  
4. Use the Up arrow and Down arrow keys to select an item from the Boot  
Selection Menu and press Enter.  
The next time the server starts, it returns to the startup sequence that is set in the  
Setup utility.  
114 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RAID controllers  
The following table lists the various utilities available to configure RAID controllers  
before an operating system is installed.  
Table 15. RAID utilities  
RAID configuration  
utility  
Where to find more  
information  
Description  
Location  
EasyStartup RAID  
configuration utility  
EasyStartup DVD  
v For use with all  
factory-supported  
RAID controllers  
v Automatically  
detects hardware  
and lists all  
supported RAID  
configurations  
v Configures one  
disk array per  
controller using all  
drives currently  
attached to the  
controller  
v Created a RAID  
response file that  
can be used to  
configure RAID  
controllers on  
similarly configured  
Lenovo servers.  
MegaRAID BIOS  
Configuration Utility  
(WebBIOS)  
For:  
In system firmware.  
To access:  
v ServeRAID-MR10i  
controller  
v Use UEFI Setup  
Utility.  
v Press Ctrl + H at  
the WebBIOS  
prompt during  
startup.  
LSI Logic MPT Setup For:  
Utility  
In system firmware.  
To access:  
v ServeRAID BR10il  
controller  
v Use UEFI Setup  
Utility.  
v Press Ctrl + C at  
the LSI prompt  
during startup.  
Using the WebBIOS utility  
The WebBIOS configuration utility enables you to create and manage RAID  
configurations on LSI SAS controllers. The WebBIOS utility resides in the SAS  
controller BIOS and operates independently of the operating system. The WebBIOS  
utility provides a configuration wizard to guide you through the configuration of  
virtual disks and physical arrays.  
Starting the WebBIOS utility  
Perform the following steps to start the WebBIOS utility and access the main menu:  
Chapter 7. Configuring the server 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. After you turn on the power and when the computer is starting, you are  
prompted to press Ctrl + H when the following message is displayed:  
Copyright© LSI Logic Corporation  
Press <Ctrl><H> for WebBIOS  
2. Select an adapter from the list.  
3. Click Start. The main WebBIOS utility interface is displayed. You can toggle  
between the physical view and logical view of the storage devices that are  
connected to the controller. Click Physical View or Logical View on the menu  
in the left pane to change the view.  
Main menu of the WebBIOS utility  
The main menu includes the following options:  
Adapter Properties  
From this view, you can display and modify the properties of the SAS  
adapter that is currently selected.  
Scan Devices  
From this view, you can re-scan the physical and virtual disks for any  
changes in the drive status or physical configuration.  
Virtual Disks  
From this view, you can display and modify the virtual disk properties,  
delete virtual disks, initialize disks, and perform other tasks.  
Physical Drives  
From this view, you can view the physical drive properties, create hot spare  
disks, and perform other tasks.  
Configuration Wizard  
Select this to start the Configuration Wizard and create a new storage  
configuration, clear a configuration, or add a new configuration.  
Adapter Selection  
From this view, you can select a different SAS adapter. Then, you can view  
information about the adapter and the drives connected to it, or create a  
new configuration for the adapter.  
Physical View or Logical View  
Select this to toggle between the Physical View and Logical View.  
Events  
From this view, you can display the system events in the Event Information  
page.  
Exit  
Select this to exit the WebBIOS utility and continue with the system boot.  
Creating a storage configuration using the Configuration Wizard  
Follow these steps to start create a storage configuration:  
1. Click Configuration Wizard to start the wizard.  
2. Select a configuration option:  
Attention: If you select Clear Configuration or New Configuration, all  
existing data in the configuration is deleted. Make a backup copy of any data  
that you want to keep before selecting these options.  
Clear Configuration  
Clears the existing configuration.  
116 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
New Configuration  
Clears the existing configuration and lets you create a new  
configuration.  
Add Configuration  
Retains the existing storage configuration and adds new drives to it (this  
does not cause any data loss).  
3. Click Next.  
4. Select a configuration mode from the following options:  
Custom Configuration  
In this mode, you can control all attributes of the new storage  
configuration.  
Auto Configuration and Redundancy  
This mode automatically creates an optimal RAID 1 or RAID 5  
configuration, providing data redundancy.  
Auto Configuration without Redundancy  
This mode automatically created a non-redundant RAID 0 configuration.  
5. Click Next to continue.  
Viewing and changing adapter properties  
You can view information for one LSI SAS adapter at a time. If your system has  
multiple LSI SAS adapters, you can view information for a different adapter, click  
Adapter Selection on the main view. To view the properties for the currently  
selected adapter, click Adapter Properties on the main WebBIOS screen.  
Viewing and changing virtual disk properties  
On the WebBIOS main screen, select a virtual disk from the list and click Virtual  
Disk.  
The Properties panel displays the RAID level, state, size, and stripe size.  
The Policies panel lists the virtual disk policies that were defined when the storage  
configuration was created. To change any of these policies, select a policy from the  
menu and click Change. The Operations panel lists operations that can be  
performed on the virtual disk. Select the operation and click Go. Then choose from  
the following operations:  
v Select Del to delete this virtual disk.  
v Select Locate and the LEDs flash on the physical drives used by this virtual disk.  
v Select Fast or Slow to initialize this virtual disk.  
Attention: Before you run an initialization, back up any data on the virtual disk  
that you want to save. All data on the virtual disk is lost when you initialize it.  
Using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD simplifies the process of configuring your RAID  
controllers and installing an operating system. The program works in conjunction  
with your Windows or Linux operating-system installation disc to automate the  
process of installing the operating systems and associated device drivers.  
If you did not receive an ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD with your server, you can  
download an image from the Lenovo Support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/  
Chapter 7. Configuring the server 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The EasyStartup program has the following features:  
v Self-booting DVD  
v Easy-to-use, language-selectable interface  
v Integrated help system  
v Automatic hardware detection  
v RAID configuration utility  
v Device drivers provided based on the server model and detected devices  
v Selectable partition size and file system  
v Support for multiple operating systems  
v Installs the operating system and device drivers in an unattended mode to save  
time  
v Creates a reuseable response file that can be used with similarly configured  
Lenovo servers to make future installations even faster.  
Before you use the EasyStartup DVD  
Functionality and supported operating systems can vary with different versions of  
the EasyStartup program. To learn more about the version you have, do the  
following:  
1. Insert the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD and restart the server.  
2. Advance to the Home screen.  
3. Click Compatability notes. The compatability notes feature provides detailed  
information about the RAID controllers, operating systems, and server  
configurations supported by that version of the EasyStartup program.  
4. Click User Guide. The User Guide provides an overview of the various  
functions provided by that version of the EasyStartup program.  
Before using the EasyStartup program to install an operating system, make sure  
any external storage devices and fiber channels are configured correctly.  
Setup and configuration  
When you start the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD, you will be prompted for the  
following:  
v Select the language in which you want to view the program.  
v Select the language of the keyboard you will be using with the program.  
Note: The following language keyboards are supported: English, French, German,  
Spanish, Japanese, Turkish, Italian, and Dutch.  
You will then see one or more reminders about configuring storage devices, and  
then you will be presented with the Lenovo License Agreement. Read the license  
agreement carefully. You must agree with terms in order to continue.  
After agreeing to the license agreement, you will be given the following choices:  
v Continue to the main program interface  
v Use a shortcut to install an operating system based a response file that you  
previously created using the EasyStartup program  
v Use a shortcut to configure RAID controllers based on a RAID response file that  
you previously created using the EasyStartup program  
118 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you continue to the main program interface, you will have the following selectable  
options:  
v Compatibility notes: This selection provides information about the RAID  
controllers, operating systems, and server configurations supported by that  
version of the EasyStartup program.  
v User Guide: This selection provides information about the features provided by  
that version of the EasyStartup program.  
v Hardware list: This selection displays a list of hardware devices detected by the  
EasyStartup program.  
v Configure RAID: This selection enables you to view the current RAID  
configuration for each installed RAID controller and make changes if needed.  
v Install operating system: This selection displays a series of choices and  
prompts to collect information required for installation, prepares the hard disk for  
installation, and then initiates the installation process using the user-provided  
operating-system installation CD or DVD.  
v About: This selection displays version information and legal notices.  
Configuring RAID  
The RAID configuration feature that is part of the EasyStartup program enables you  
to view and change RAID settings for supported RAID controllers. Through this  
feature, you have the ability to configure each installed controller. The program  
automatically detects the number of discs currently attached to the controller,  
determines the possible RAID configurations that can be configured, and prompts  
you through the steps to configure one or more disc arrays with or without  
hot-spare drives. As you configure each controller you will be given the option to  
save the RAID configuration settings to a RAID response file, which you can use on  
other similarly configured Lenovo servers. This method satisfies most users’ needs.  
Using LSI Configuration Utility program  
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage redundant array  
of independent disks (RAID) arrays. Be sure to use this program as described in  
this document.  
v Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to perform the following tasks:  
– Perform a low-level format on a hard disk drive  
– Create an array of hard disk drives with or without a hot-spare drive  
– Set protocol parameters on hard disk drives  
The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports RAID arrays.  
You can use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure RAID 1 (IM), RAID  
1E (IME), and RAID 0 (IS) for a single pair of attached devices. If you install a  
different type of RAID adapter, follow the instructions in the documentation that  
comes with the adapter to view or change settings for attached devices.  
When you are using the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage  
arrays, consider the following information:  
v The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports the following  
features:  
– Integrated Mirroring (IM) with hot-spare support (also known as RAID 1)  
Use this option to create an integrated array of two disks plus up to two  
optional hot spares. All data on the primary disk can be migrated.  
Chapter 7. Configuring the server 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– Integrated Mirroring Enhanced (IME) with hot-spare support (also known as  
RAID 1E)  
Use this option to create an integrated mirror enhanced array of three to eight  
disks, including up to two optional hot spares. All data on the array disks will  
be deleted.  
– Integrated Striping (IS) (also known as RAID 0)  
Use this option to create an integrated striping array of two to eight disks. All  
data on the array disks will be deleted.  
v Hard disk drive capacities affect how you create arrays. The drives in an array  
can have different capacities, but the RAID controller treats them as if they all  
have the capacity of the smallest hard disk drive.  
v If you use an integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities to configure  
a RAID 1 (mirrored) array after you have installed the operating system, you will  
lose access to any data or applications that were previously stored on the  
secondary drive of the mirrored pair.  
v If you install a different type of RAID controller, see the documentation that  
comes with the controller for information about viewing and changing settings for  
attached devices.  
Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program  
To start the LSI Configuration Utility program, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,  
the power-control button becomes active.  
2. When the prompt <F1 Setup> is displayed, press F1. If you have set an  
administrator password, you are prompted to type the password.  
3. Select System Settings Adapters and UEFI drivers.  
4. Select Please refresh this page on the first visit and press Enter.  
5. Select LSI controller_driver_name Driver and press Enter, where  
controller_driver_name is the name of the SAS/SATA controller driver. For the  
SAS/SATA controller driver name, see the documentation that comes with your  
controller.  
6. To perform storage-management tasks, follow the procedures in the  
documentation that comes with the SAS/SATA controller.  
When you have finished changing settings, press Esc to exit from the program;  
select Save to save the settings that you have changed.  
Formatting a hard disk drive  
Low-level formatting removes all data from the hard disk. If there is data on the disk  
that you want to save, back up the hard disk before you perform this procedure.  
Note: Before you format a hard disk, make sure that the disk is not part of a  
mirrored pair.  
To format a drive, complete the following steps:  
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for the drive that you  
want to format and press Enter.  
2. Select SAS Topology and press Enter.  
3. Select Direct Attach Devices and press Enter.  
120 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. To highlight the drive that you want to format, use the Up Arrow and Down  
Arrow keys. To scroll left and right, use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys or  
the End key. Press Alt+D.  
5. To start the low-level formatting operation, select Format and press Enter.  
Creating a RAID array of hard disk drives  
To create a RAID array of hard disk drives, complete the following steps:  
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for the drives that you  
want to mirror.  
2. Select RAID Properties.  
3. Select the type of array that you want to create.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the first drive in the pair; then, press the Minus  
(-) or Plus (+) key to change the mirror value to Primary.  
5. Continue to select the next drive using the Minus (-) or Plus (+) key until you  
have selected all the drives for your array.  
6. Press C to create the disk array.  
7. Select Apply changes and exit menu to create the array.  
Typical operating system installation  
When you select Install operating system, you will be prompted for information  
required for the installation. The prompts vary depending on the operating system  
selected. This section describes the tasks associated with a typical Windows  
operating system installation. Each task must be completed in order before moving  
to the next task.  
Note: Ensure that your RAID controller is correctly configured before you select an  
operating system to install.  
v Select operating system: This task enables you to select the operating system  
that you will be installing.  
v Select disk: This task enables you to select the disk where you want to install  
the operating system.  
Note: The disk that you select must be set as the boot disk in UEFI.  
v Partitions options: This task enables you to choose whether you want to  
repartition the selected drive or use an existing partition.  
v Partition settings: This task enables you to choose the file system type and  
define the partition size.  
v Installation settings: This task prompts you for user and system settings, the  
operating system product key, and the administrator password.  
v Network settings: This task prompts you for domain and workgroup settings,  
Ethernet controller type, IP address settings, DNS settings, and WINS address  
settings.  
v Install applications: This task enables you to run custom commands or scripts  
at the end of the installation process, install ThinkServer EasyManage software  
to help you manage your servers, and install the Easy Update program to keep  
your servers up to date.  
v Install Windows components: This task enables you to install optional  
Windows components such as IIS, ASP.NET, and SNMP.  
v Confirm settings: This task enables you to review all of the information you  
provided.  
Chapter 7. Configuring the server 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Save response file: This task gives you the option of saving the information on  
a diskette or USB device as a response file for future installations on similarly  
configured Lenovo servers.  
v Start installation: This task starts the actual installation process. First, the disk  
is prepared using the disk and partition information you specified. Then you are  
prompted to insert the operating system disk, and the operating system is  
installed using the information that you specified.  
Enabling the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program  
The Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program is part of the server firmware. You  
can use it to configure the network as a startable device, and you can customize  
where the network startup option appears in the startup sequence. Enable and  
disable the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program from the Setup Utility.  
To enable the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program, do the following:  
1. From the Setup Utility main menu, select Devices and I/O Ports and press  
Enter.  
2. Select Enable/Disable onboard devices and press Enter.  
3. Select Ethernet and press Enter.  
4. Select Enable and press Enter.  
5. Exit to the main menu and select Save Settings.  
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller  
The Ethernet controllers are integrated on the system board. They provides an  
interface for connecting to a 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1 Gbps network and provides  
full-duplex (FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission and reception  
of data on the network. If the Ethernet ports in the server supports auto-negotiation,  
the controllers detect the data-transfer rate (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or  
1000BASE-T) and duplex mode (full-duplex or half-duplex) of the network and  
automatically operates at that rate and mode.  
You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controllers. However, you must  
install a device driver to enable the operating system to address the controllers. For  
device drivers and information about configuring the Ethernet controllers, see the  
Intel Hartwell 82574L Gigabit Ethernet Software CD that comes with the server.  
Updating the firmware  
The firmware in the server is periodically updated and is available for download on  
the Lenovo Support Web site. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for the  
latest level of firmware, such as unified extensible firmware interface (UEFI) code,  
vital product data (VPD) code, device drivers, and service processor firmware.  
When you replace a device in the server, you might have to either update the  
server with the latest version of the firmware that is stored in memory on the device  
or restore the pre-existing firmware from a diskette or CD image.  
v UEFI code is stored in ROM on the system board.  
v IMM firmware is stored in ROM on the baseboard management controller on the  
system board.  
v Ethernet firmware is stored in ROM on the Ethernet controller.  
v ServeRAID firmware is stored in ROM on the SAS controller.  
122 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v SAS firmware is stored in ROM on the integrated RAID controller on the system  
board.  
v Major components contain vital product data (VPD) code. You can select to  
update the VPD code during the UEFI code update procedure.  
The following items are downloadable at http://www.lenovo.com/support:  
v Diagnostic programs  
v IMM firmware  
v Ethernet firmware  
Using the EasyUpdate Firmware Updater tool  
ThinkServer EasyUpdate Firmware Updater is a software application that enables  
you to maintain your system firmware up to date and helps you avoid unnecessary  
outages. Firmware Updater updates the server firmware in two steps, by updating  
system and adapter firmware and updating hard disk drive (HDD) firmware.  
To update your system, first go the Lenovo Support Web site and obtain the ISO  
file.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers  
and Storage from the Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TS200, and click Continue.  
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
5. Download the ThinkServer firmware update media ISO file.  
6. Burn the ISO image to CD or DVD.  
7. Insert the media in the server CD/DVD drive, and boot the server to that drive.  
8. After DOS starts, the master application starts automatically. Hardware detection  
runs, and a list of applicable firmware updates is displayed.  
9. Select the firmware updates that you want to install.  
Before distributing the firmware update to other servers, ensure that your server can  
restart successfully without encountering hardware problems.  
Starting the backup server firmware  
The system board contains a backup copy area for the server firmware. This is a  
secondary copy of server firmware that you update only during the process of  
updating server firmware. If the primary copy of the server firmware becomes  
damaged, use this backup copy.  
To force the server to start from the backup copy, turn off the server; then, place the  
UEFI boot recovery J29 jumper in the backup position (pins 2 and 3).  
Use the backup copy of the server firmware until the primary copy is restored. After  
the primary copy is restored, turn off the server; then, move the UEFI boot recovery  
J29 jumper back to the primary position (pins 1 and 2).  
Using the Integrated Management Module  
The Integrated Management Module (IMM) is a second generation of the functions  
that were formerly provided by the baseboard management controller hardware. It  
combines service processor functions, video controller, and (when IMM Premium is  
installed) remote presence function in a single chip.  
Chapter 7. Configuring the server 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The IMM supports the following basic system management features:  
v Environmental monitor with fan speed control for temperature, voltages, fan  
failure, power supply failure, and power backplane failure.  
v LED indicators to report errors that occur with fans, power supplies,  
microprocessor, hard disk drives, and system errors  
v DIMM error assistance. The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) will  
disable a failing DIMM that is detected during POST IMM will light the associated  
system-error LED and the failing DIMM error LED.  
v System-event log (SEL)  
v ROM-based IMM firmware flash (IMM firmware updates)  
v Auto Boot Failure Recovery (ABR)  
v A virtual media key which enables full system management support (remote  
video, remote keyboard/mouse, and remote storage)  
v Automatic microprocessor disable on failure restart in a two-microprocessor  
configuration when one microprocessor signals an internal error  
v NMI detection and reporting  
v SMI handling  
v Automatic Server Restart (ASR) when (1) POST is not complete or (2) the OS  
hangs and the OS Watchdog Timer times-out. The IMM might be configured to  
watch for OS Watchdog Timer and reboot the system after timeout, if the ASR  
feature is enabled. Otherwise, IMM allows the administrator to generate an NMI  
by pressing an NMI button on the system board for OS memory dump. ASR is  
supported by IPMI.  
v Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Specification V 2.0 and  
Intelligent Platform Management Bus (IPMB) support  
v Invalid system configuration (CNFG) LED support  
v Serial redirect  
v Serial Over LAN (SOL)  
v Query power supply input power  
v PECI 2 support  
v Power/Reset control (power-on, hard and soft shut down, hard and soft reset,  
schedule power control)  
v Alerts (in-band and out-of-band alerting, PET traps - IPMI style, SNMP, e-mail)  
v Operating system failure blue screen capture  
v Command line interface  
v Configuration save and restore  
v PCI configuration data  
v Boot sequence manipulation  
The IMM also provides the following remote server management capabilities:  
v Command-line interface (IPMI Shell)  
The command-line interface provides direct access to server management  
functions through the IPMI 2.0 protocol. Use the command-line interface to issue  
commands to control the server power, view system information, and identify the  
server. You can also save one or more commands as a text file and run the file  
as a script.  
v Serial over LAN  
Establish a Serial over LAN (SOL) connection to manage servers from a remote  
location. You can remotely view and change the UEFI settings, restart the server,  
124 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
identify the server, and perform other management functions. Any standard Telnet  
client application can access the SOL connection.  
Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture  
The remote presence and blue-screen capture features are integrated functions of  
the integrated management module (IMM). These integrated functions allow you to  
remotely mount or unmount drives or images on the client system as well as  
accessing the Web interface.  
The remote presence feature provides the following functions:  
v Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1600 x 1200 at 85 Hz,  
regardless of the system state  
v Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote  
client  
v Mapping the CD or DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a remote  
client, and mapping ISO and diskette image files as virtual drives that are  
available for use by the server  
v Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server as a  
virtual drive  
The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the IMM  
restarts the server when the IMM detects an operating-system hang condition. A  
system administrator can use the blue-screen capture to assist in determining the  
cause of the hang condition.  
Obtaining the IP address for the Web interface access  
To access the Web interface and use the remote presence feature, you need the IP  
address for the IMM. You can obtain the IMM IP address through the Setup Utility.  
To locate the IP address, do the following:  
1. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the  
power-control button becomes active.  
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a  
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the  
administrator password to access the full Setup Utility menu.  
3. From the Setup Utility main menu, select System Settings.  
4. On the next screen, select Integrated Management Module.  
5. On the next screen, select Network Configuration.  
6. Find the IP address and write it down.  
7. Exit from the Setup Utility.  
Logging on to the Web interface  
To log on to the Web interface to use the remote presence functions, complete the  
following steps:  
1. Open a Web browser and in the address or URL field, type the IP address or  
host name of the IMM to which you want to connect.  
Note: The IMM defaults to DHCP. If a DHCP host is not available, the IMM  
assigns a static IP address of 192.168.70.125.  
Chapter 7. Configuring the server 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. On the Login page, type the user name and password. If you are using the IMM  
for the first time, you can obtain the user name and password from your system  
administrator. All login attempts are documented in the event log.  
Note: The IMM is set initially with a user name of USERID and password of  
PASSW0RD (passw0rd with a zero, not a the letter O). You have read/write  
access. You must change the default password the first time you log on.  
3. On the Welcome page, type a timeout value (in minutes) in the field that is  
provided. The IMM will log you off of the Web interface if your browser is  
inactive for the number of minutes that you entered for the timeout value.  
4. Click Continue to start the session. The System Health page provides a quick  
view of the system status.  
Advanced Settings Utility program  
The Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program is an alternative to the Setup Utility  
for modifying UEFI settings. Use the ASU program online or out-of-band to modify  
UEFI settings from the command line without the need to restart the server to  
access the Setup Utility.  
You can also use the ASU program to configure the optional remote presence  
features or other IMM settings. The remote presence features provide enhanced  
systems-management capabilities.  
In addition, the ASU program provides limited settings for configuring the IPMI  
function in the IMM through the command-line interface.  
Use the command-line interface to issue setup commands. You can save any of the  
settings as a file and run the file as a script. The ASU program supports scripting  
environments through a batch-processing mode.  
Installing ThinkServer EasyManage software  
You can install the ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server program from the  
ThinkServer EasyManage CD or you can download and install the program from  
http://www.lenovo.com/support. After one instance of the ThinkServer EasyManage  
Core Server has been installed, you can use the ThinkServer EasyManage Agent  
installer to install the agent on other servers and clients on the network.  
Also, the ThinkServer EasyStartupprogram provides an option to either install the  
ThinkServer EasyManage Agent as part of the operating system installation process  
or install a desktop icon to assist with the installation of the ThinkServer  
EasyManage Core Server after the operating system has been installed.  
Installation requirements  
Before installing ThinkServer EasyManage software on your server, your  
environment must meet the following requirements:  
v Microsoft Windows Server 2008 is installed on the server where you intend to  
install the Core Server.  
v The original Windows Server operating system installation CDs are available in  
case files are needed while installing the prerequisites.  
v The server has Internet access to obtain prerequisites and to activate the  
software after the installation is complete.  
v The server has a static IP address.  
126 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v The server is not a domain controller. However, it is recommended to have the  
server join a domain.  
v The account that you use to log in and to install the Core Server has  
Administrator privileges on the server with full read/write access. Ideally, this  
account is also a Domain Administrator account. This account will be used to  
create the initial administrator-level account used to log in to the ThinkServer  
EasyManage console.  
v Any previous agent from EasyManage or LANDesk must be removed prior to  
installing the Core Server and Management Console.  
Installation order  
The order in which you install the operating system and Windows Components is  
critical to install ThinkServer EasyManage software successfully. To ensure a clean,  
working installation of ThinkServer EasyManage software, use the following  
installation order:  
1. Install Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32-bit with the latest Service Pack.  
2. Install the following Windows Components: See “Installing Windows 2008 32-bit  
3. Use Windows Update to install all available critical updates.  
4. Download Microsoft Web Services Enhancement 2.0 Service Pack 3 (LANDesk  
Process Manager only) from the following Web site: http://www.microsoft.com/  
&DisplayLang=en. Install the software using the default settings.  
Note: This specific version is required.  
5. Use Windows Update to install all available critical updates.  
6. Launch the EasyManage installation.  
7. After ThinkServer EasyManage is installed, enable Security and Patch Manager  
to obtain the LANDesk 8.8 Software Updates. In the console application, click  
Help -> LANDesk -> Security Updates for a guide to configuring Security and  
Patch Manager.  
8. Install Adobe Flash Player 9 if you plan to use the Management Console  
functions from the same server on which the Core Server is installed. You can  
obtain Adobe Flash Player 9 from the Adobe Web site:  
Installing Windows 2008 32-bit components  
To install the Windows Server 2008 32-bit components necessary for a ThinkServer  
EasyManage core server installation, complete the steps in this section.  
Installing Web Server Role (IIS)  
To install the Web Server Role (IIS), do the following:  
1. Click Start -> Server Manager.  
2. Under Roles Summary, click Add Roles. The Add Roles wizard appears.  
3. Click Next.  
4. Select the checkbox next to Web Server (IIS). A dialog box displays the  
additional features that are required.  
5. Click Add Required Features, then click Next. In the list of additional role  
services that can be installed, ensure that the follow are checked:  
v HTTP Redirection  
v Static Content  
Chapter 7. Configuring the server 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v ASP.NET  
v ASP  
v CGI  
v Server Side Includes  
v Windows Authentication  
v IIS 6 Metabase Compatibility  
Note: When you select ASP.Net or ASP, a dialog box displays the additional  
role services required. Click Add Required Role Services.  
6. Click Install.  
Note: If IIS is already installed and certain Role Services are still required,  
expand Roles in the tree view on the left in Server Manager and click on Web  
Server (IIS), then click on Add Role Services. Select the necessary role  
services and click Install.  
Installing Microsoft SNMP services  
To install Microsoft SNMP services, do the following:  
1. Click Add Features in the Features Summary section on the main page of  
Server Manager.  
2. Select the SNMP Services checkbox.  
3. Click Next, then Install.  
Uninstalling the LANDesk Software Agent  
If the Core Server has LANDesk agents on it from a previous Management Suite  
release, it will fail the autorun prerequisite check. You must remove the old agents  
by running uninstallwinclient.exe from the \Program Files\LANDesk\  
ManagementSuite folder.  
128 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting  
This chapter describes the diagnostic tools that are available to help you solve  
problems that might occur in the server.  
If you cannot diagnose and correct a problem by using the information in this  
more information.  
Troubleshooting tables  
Use the troubleshooting tables to find solutions to problems that have identifiable  
symptoms.  
If you cannot find a problem in these tables, see the Running the diagnostic  
programsin the Hardware Maintenance Manual for information about testing the  
server.  
If you have just added new software or a new optional device and the server is not  
working, complete the following steps before you use the troubleshooting tables:  
1. Check the operator information panel.  
2. Remove the software or device that you just added.  
3. Run the diagnostic tests to determine whether the server is running correctly.  
4. Reinstall the new software or new device.  
DVD drive problems  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The DVD drive is not  
recognized.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The SATA channel to which the DVD drive is attached (primary or  
secondary) is enabled in the Setup Utility.  
v All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.  
v The signal cable and connector are not damaged and the connector pins are  
not bent.  
v The correct device driver is installed for the DVD drive.  
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.  
3. Reseat the following components:  
a. DVD drive  
b. DVD drive cables  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. DVD drive  
b. DVD drive and cables  
c. (Trained service technician only) System board  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
A DVD is not working correctly.  
1. Clean the DVD.  
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.  
3. Reseat the DVD drive.  
4. Replace the DVD drive.  
The DVD drive tray is not  
working.  
1. Make sure that the server is turned on.  
2. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release  
opening.  
3. Reseat the DVD drive.  
4. Replace the DVD drive.  
General problems  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
A cover lock is broken, an LED If the part is a CRU, replace it. If the part is a FRU, the part must be replaced by a  
is not working, or a similar  
problem has occurred.  
trained service technician.  
Hard disk drive problems  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
Not all drives are recognized by Remove the drive that is indicated by the diagnostic tests; then, run the hard disk  
the hard disk drive diagnostic  
tests.  
drive diagnostic tests again. If the remaining drives are recognized, replace the  
drive that you removed with a new one.  
The server stops responding  
during the hard disk drive  
diagnostic test.  
Remove the hard disk drive that was being tested when the server stopped  
responding, and run the diagnostic test again. If the hard disk drive diagnostic test  
runs successfully, replace the drive that you removed with a new one.  
A hard disk drive was not  
detected while the operating  
system was being started.  
Reseat all hard disk drives and cables; then, run the hard disk drive diagnostic  
tests again.  
130 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
A hard disk drive passes the  
diagnostic Fixed Disk Test, but  
the problem remains.  
Run the diagnostic SCSI Fixed Disk Test (see “Running the diagnostic programs”  
Note: This test is not available on servers that have RAID arrays or servers that  
have SATA hard disk drives.  
Intermittent problems  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
A problem occurs only  
occasionally and is difficult to  
diagnose.  
1. Make sure that:  
v All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the server and  
attached devices.  
v When the server is turned on, air is flowing from the fan grille. If there is no  
airflow, the fan is not working. This can cause the server to overheat and  
shut down.  
2. Check the system-event log or IMM log (see “Event logs” on page 142).  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
All or some keys on the  
keyboard do not work.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The keyboard cable is securely connected.  
v The server and the monitor are turned on.  
2. See http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver and click Options for keyboard  
compatibility.  
3. If you are using a USB keyboard, run the Setup Utility and enable keyboardless  
operation to prevent the 301 POST error message from being displayed during  
startup.  
4. If you are using a USB keyboard and it is connected to a USB hub, disconnect  
the keyboard from the hub and connect it directly to the server.  
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Keyboard  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
The mouse or pointing device  
does not work.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The mouse or pointing device is compatible with the server. See  
http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver and click the Options tab.  
v The mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected to the server.  
v The mouse or pointing-device device drivers are installed correctly.  
v The server and the monitor are turned on.  
v The mouse is enabled in the Setup Utility.  
2. If you are using a USB mouse or pointing device and it is connected to a USB  
hub, disconnect the mouse or pointing device from the hub and connect it  
directly to the server.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Mouse or pointing device  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
132 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Memory problems  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The amount of system memory  
that is displayed is less than the  
amount of installed physical  
memory.  
1. Make sure that:  
v No error LEDs are lit on the operator information panel or on the DIMM.  
v Memory mirroring does not account for the discrepancy.  
v The memory modules are seated correctly.  
v You have installed the correct type of memory.  
v If you changed the memory, you updated the memory configuration in the  
Setup Utility.  
v All banks of memory are enabled. The server might have automatically  
disabled a memory bank when it detected a problem, or a memory bank  
might have been manually disabled.  
2. Check the POST event log for DIMM error messages:  
v If a DIMM was disabled by a systems-management interrupt (SMI), replace  
the DIMM.  
v If a DIMM was disabled by the user or by POST, run the Setup Utility and  
enable the DIMM.  
3. Run memory diagnostics (see Diagnostic programs, messages, and error  
codesin the Hardware Maintenance Manual).  
4. Make sure that there is no memory mismatch when the server is at the  
minimum memory configuration (two 512 MB DIMMs; see the information about  
the minimum required configuration on page “Solving undetermined problems”  
5. Add one pair of DIMMs at a time, making sure that the DIMMs in each pair are  
matching.  
6. Reseat the DIMMs.  
7. Replace the DIMMs in step 6, one at a time, in the order shown, restarting the  
server each time.  
Multiple rows of DIMMs in a  
branch are identified as failing.  
1. Reseat the DIMMs; then, restart the server.  
2. Replace the lowest-numbered DIMMs with identical known good DIMMs; then,  
restart the server. Repeat as necessary. If the failures continue after all  
identified pairs are replaced, go to step4.  
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to their original connectors,  
restarting the server after each pair, until a pair fails. Replace each DIMM in the  
failed pair with an identical known good DIMM, restarting the server after you  
reinstall each DIMM. Replace the failed DIMM. Repeat step 3 until you have  
tested all removed DIMMs.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Microprocessor problems  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The server emits a continuous  
beep during POST, indicating  
that the startup (boot)  
microprocessor is not working  
correctly.  
1. Correct any errors that are indicated by the system board LEDs (see  
2. Make sure that the server supports all the microprocessors and that the  
microprocessors match in speed and cache size.  
3. (Trained service technician only) Reseat microprocessor 1.  
4. (Trained service technician only) If there is no indication of which  
microprocessor has failed, isolate the error by testing with one microprocessor  
at a time.  
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. (Trained service technician only) Microprocessor 2  
b. VRM 2  
c. (Trained service technician only) System board  
6. (Trained service technician only) If multiple error codes indicate a  
microprocessor error, reverse the locations of two microprocessors to determine  
whether the error is associated with a microprocessor or with a microprocessor  
socket.  
v If the error is associated with a microprocessor, replace the microprocessor.  
v If the error is associated with a VRM, replace the VRM.  
v If the error is associated with a microprocessor socket, replace the system  
board.  
134 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitor problems  
Some monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem with your  
monitor, see the documentation that comes with the monitor for instructions for  
testing and adjusting the monitor.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
Testing the monitor  
1. Make sure that the monitor cables are firmly connected.  
2. Try using a different monitor on the server, or try using the monitor that is being  
tested on a different server.  
3. Run the diagnostic programs. If the monitor passes the diagnostic programs,  
the problem might be a video device driver.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.  
The screen is blank.  
1. If the server is attached to a KVM switch, bypass the KVM switch to eliminate it  
as a possible cause of the problem: connect the monitor cable directly to the  
correct connector on the rear of the server.  
2. Make sure that:  
v The server is turned on. If there is no power to the server, see “Power  
v The monitor cables are connected correctly.  
v The monitor is turned on and the brightness and contrast controls are  
adjusted correctly.  
v No POST errors are generated when the server is turned on.  
3. Make sure that the correct server is controlling the monitor, if applicable.  
The monitor works when you  
turn on the server, but the  
screen goes blank when you  
start some application  
programs.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The application program is not setting a display mode that is higher than the  
capability of the monitor.  
v You installed the necessary device drivers for the application.  
v If the server passes the video diagnostics, the video is good; see “Solving  
v (Trained service technician only) If the server fails the video diagnostics,  
replace the system board.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The monitor has screen jitter, or  
the screen image is wavy,  
unreadable, rolling, or distorted.  
1. If the monitor self-tests show that the monitor is working correctly, consider the  
location of the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as  
transformers, appliances, fluorescent lights, and other monitors) can cause  
screen jitter or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this  
happens, turn off the monitor.  
Attention: Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might cause screen  
discoloration.  
Move the device and the monitor at least 305 mm (12 in.) apart, and turn on  
the monitor.  
To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, make sure that the distance  
between the monitor and any external diskette drive is at least 76 mm (3 in.).  
2. Reseat the monitor.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Monitor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
Wrong characters appear on the  
screen.  
1. If the wrong language is displayed, update the server firmware with the correct  
2. Reseat the monitor  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Monitor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
Optional-device problems  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
A Lenovo optional device that  
was just installed does not  
work.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The device is designed for the server (see http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver  
and click the Options tab).  
v You followed the installation instructions that came with the device and the  
device is installed correctly.  
v You have not loosened any other installed devices or cables.  
v You updated the configuration information in the Setup Utility. Whenever  
memory or any other device is changed, you must update the configuration.  
2. Reseat the device that you just installed.  
3. Replace the device that you just installed.  
136 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
A Lenovo optional device that  
used to work does not work  
now.  
1. Make sure that all of the hardware and cable connections for the device are  
secure.  
2. If the device comes with test instructions, use those instructions to test the  
device.  
3. If the failing device is a SCSI device, make sure that:  
v The cables for all external SCSI devices are connected correctly.  
v The last device in each SCSI chain, or the end of the SCSI cable, is  
terminated correctly.  
v Any external SCSI device is turned on. You must turn on an external SCSI  
device before you turn on the server.  
4. Reseat the failing device.  
5. Replace the failing device.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power problems  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The power-control button does  
not work (the server does not  
start).  
Note: The power-control button  
will not function until 3 minutes  
after the server has been  
connected to ac power.  
1. Make sure that the power-control button is working correctly:  
a. Disconnect the server power cords.  
b. Reconnect the power cords.  
c. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the operator information panel  
cables, and then repeat steps 1a and 1b. If the server starts, reseat the  
operator information panel. If the problem remains, replace the operator  
information panel.  
2. Make sure that:  
v The power cords are correctly connected to the server and to a working  
electrical outlet.  
v The type of memory that is installed is correct.  
v The DIMM is fully seated.  
v The LEDs on the power supply do not indicate a problem.  
v The microprocessors are installed in the correct sequence.  
3. Reseat the following components:  
a. DIMMs  
b. (Trained service technician only) Power switch connector  
c. (Trained service technician only) Power backplane  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. DIMMs  
b. (Trained service technician only) Power switch connector  
c. (Trained service technician only) Power backplane  
d. (Trained service technician only) System board  
5. If you just installed an optional device, remove it, and restart the server. If the  
server now starts, you might have installed more devices than the power supply  
supports.  
The server does not turn off.  
1. Determine whether you are using an Advanced Configuration and Power  
Interface (ACPI) or a non-ACPI operating system. If you are using a non-ACPI  
operating system, do the following:  
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.  
b. Turn off the server by pressing the power-control button for 5 seconds.  
c. Restart the server.  
d. If the server fails POST and the power-control button does not work,  
disconnect the power cord for 20 seconds; then, reconnect the power cord  
and restart the server.  
2. If the problem remains or if you are using an ACPI-aware operating system,  
suspect the system board.  
138 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The server unexpectedly shuts See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 142.  
down, and the LEDs on the  
operator information panel are  
not lit.  
Serial port problems  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The number of serial ports that  
are identified by the operating  
system is less than the number  
of installed serial ports.  
1. Make sure that:  
v Each port is assigned a unique address in the Setup Utility and none of the  
serial ports is disabled.  
v The serial port adapter (if one is present) is seated correctly.  
2. Reseat the serial port adapter.  
3. Replace the serial port adapter.  
A serial device does not work.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The device is compatible with the server.  
v The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.  
v The device is connected to the correct connector.  
2. Reseat the following components:  
a. Failing serial device  
b. Serial cable  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Failing serial device  
b. Serial cable  
c. (Trained service technician only) System board  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Software problems  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
You suspect a software  
problem.  
1. To determine whether the problem is caused by the software, make sure that:  
v The server has the minimum memory that is needed to use the software. For  
memory requirements, see the information that comes with the software. If  
you have just installed an adapter or memory, the server might have a  
memory-address conflict.  
v The software is designed to operate on the server.  
v Other software works on the server.  
v The software works on another server.  
2. If you receive any error messages while you use the software, see the  
information that comes with the software for a description of the messages and  
suggested solutions to the problem.  
3. Contact the software vendor.  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the parts listing in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer  
replaceable units (CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
A USB device does not work.  
2. Make sure that:  
v The correct USB device driver is installed.  
v The operating system supports USB devices.  
v A standard PS/2 keyboard or mouse is not connected to the server. If it is, a  
USB keyboard or mouse will not work during POST.  
3. Make sure that the USB configuration optional devices are set correctly in the  
Setup Utility (see “Setup Utility menu choices” on page 110 for more  
information).  
4. If you are using a USB hub, disconnect the USB device from the hub and  
connect it directly to the server.  
Solving power problems  
Power problems can be difficult to solve. For example, a short circuit can exist  
anywhere on any of the power distribution buses. Usually, a short circuit will cause  
the power subsystem to shut down because of an overcurrent condition. To  
diagnose a power problem, use the following general procedure:  
1. Turn off the server and disconnect all ac power cords.  
140 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Check for loose cables in the power subsystem. Also check for short circuits, for  
example, if a loose screw is causing a short circuit on a circuit board.  
3. Remove the adapters and disconnect the cables and power cords to all internal  
and external devices until the server is at the minimum configuration that is  
required for the server to start (see “Solving undetermined problems” on page  
142 for the minimum configuration).  
4. Reconnect all ac power cords and turn on the server. If the server starts  
successfully, replace the adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is  
isolated.  
If the server does not start from the minimum configuration, replace the components  
in the minimum configuration one at a time until the problem is isolated.  
Solving Ethernet controller problems  
The method that you use to test the Ethernet controller depends on which operating  
system you are using. See the operating-system documentation for information  
about Ethernet controllers, and see the Ethernet controller device-driver readme file.  
Try the following procedures:  
v Make sure that the correct device drivers, which come with the server, are  
installed and that they are at the latest level.  
v Make sure that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly.  
– The cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is  
attached but the problem remains, try a different cable.  
– If the Ethernet controller is set to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use  
Category 5 cabling.  
– If you directly connect two servers (without a hub), or if you are not using a  
hub with X ports, use a crossover cable. To determine whether a hub has an  
X port, check the port label. If the label contains an X, the hub has an X port.  
v Determine whether the hub supports auto-negotiation. If it does not, try  
configuring the integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and  
duplex mode of the hub.  
v Check the Ethernet controller LEDs on the rear panel of the server. These LEDs  
indicate whether there is a problem with the connector, cable, or hub.  
– The Ethernet link status LED is lit when the Ethernet controller receives a link  
pulse from the hub. If the LED is off, there might be a defective connector or  
cable or a problem with the hub.  
– The Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED is lit when the Ethernet controller  
sends or receives data over the Ethernet network. If the Ethernet  
transmit/receive activity light is off, make sure that the hub and network are  
operating and that the correct device drivers are installed.  
v Check the LAN activity LEDs on the rear of the server. The LAN activity LED is lit  
when data is active on the Ethernet network. If the LAN activity LED is off, make  
sure that the hub and network are operating and that the correct device drivers  
are installed.  
v Check for operating-system-specific causes of the problem.  
v Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same  
protocol.  
If the Ethernet controller still cannot connect to the network but the hardware  
appears to be working, the network administrator must investigate other possible  
causes of the error.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Solving undetermined problems  
If the diagnostic tests did not diagnose the failure or if the server is inoperative, use  
the information in this section.  
If you suspect that a software problem is causing failures (continuous or  
Damaged data in CMOS memory or damaged firmware can cause undetermined  
problems. To reset the CMOS data, use the password switch 2 (SW4) to override  
the power-on password and clear the CMOS memory; see “System-board switches  
Check the LEDs on all the power supplies (see “Power-supply LEDs” on page 24).  
If the LEDs indicate that the power supplies are working correctly, do the following:  
1. Turn off the server.  
2. Make sure that the server is cabled correctly.  
3. Remove or disconnect the following devices, one at a time, until you find the  
failure. Turn on the server and reconfigure it each time.  
v Any external devices.  
v Surge-suppressor device (on the server).  
v Modem, printer, mouse, and non-Lenovo devices.  
v Each adapter.  
v Hard disk drives.  
v Memory modules. The minimum configuration requirement is 1 GB DIMM per  
microprocessor (2 GB in a two-microprocessor configuration).  
The following minimum configuration is required for the server to start:  
v One microprocessor  
v One 1 GB DIMM  
v One power supply  
v Power cord  
v ServeRAID SAS adapter  
v System board assembly  
4. Turn on the server. If the problem remains, suspect the following components in  
the following order:  
a. Power supply  
b. Power-supply cage  
c. Memory  
d. Microprocessor  
e. System board  
If the problem is solved when you remove an adapter from the server but the  
problem recurs when you reinstall the same adapter, suspect the adapter; if the  
problem recurs when you replace the adapter with a different one, suspect the  
system board or extender card.  
If you suspect a networking problem and the server passes all the system tests,  
suspect a network cabling problem that is external to the server.  
Event logs  
Error codes and messages are displayed in the following types of event logs:  
v POST event log: This log contains the three most recent error codes and  
messages that were generated during POST. You can view the POST event log  
through the Setup Utility.  
142 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v System-event log: This log contains all IMM, POST, and system management  
interrupt (SMI) events. You can view the system-event log through the Setup  
Utility and through the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program (as the IPMI  
event log).  
The system-event log is limited in size. When it is full, new entries will not  
overwrite existing entries; therefore, you must periodically save and then clear  
the system-event log through the Setup Utility when the IMM logs an event that  
indicates that the log is more than 75% full. When you are troubleshooting, you  
might have to save and then clear the system-event log to make the most recent  
events available for analysis.  
Messages are listed on the left side of the screen, and details about the selected  
message are displayed on the right side of the screen. To move from one entry  
to the next, use the Up Arrow () and Down Arrow () keys.  
Some IMM sensors cause assertion events to be logged when their setpoints are  
reached. When a setpoint condition no longer exists, a corresponding  
deassertion event is logged. However, not all events are assertion-type events.  
v Integrated management module (IMM) event log: This log contains a filtered  
subset of all IMM, POST, and system management interrupt (SMI) events. You  
can view the IMM event log through the IMM Web interface and through the  
Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program (as the ASM event log).  
v DSA log: This log is generated by the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program,  
and it is a chronologically ordered merge of the system-event log (as the IPMI  
event log), the IMM event log (as the ASM event log), and the operating-system  
event logs. You can view the DSA log through the DSA program.  
Viewing event logs through the Setup Utility  
To view the POST event log or system-event log, do the following:  
1. Turn on the server.  
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a  
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the  
administrator password to view the event logs.  
3. Select System Event Logs and use one of the following procedures:  
v To view the POST event log, select POST Event Viewer.  
v To view the system-event log, select System Event Log.  
Viewing event logs without restarting the server  
If the server is not hung, methods are available for you to view one or more event  
logs without having to restart the server.  
If you have installed Portable or Installable Dynamic System Analysis (DSA), you  
can use it to view the system-event log (as the IPMI event log), the IMM event log  
(as the ASM event log), or the merged DSA log. You can also use DSA Preboot to  
view these logs, although you must restart the server to use DSA Preboot. To install  
Portable DSA, Installable DSA, or DSA Preboot or to download a DSA Preboot CD  
image, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support and complete the following steps.  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual  
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers  
and Storage from the Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TS200, and click Continue.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
If IPMItool is installed in the server, you can use it to view the system-event log.  
Most recent versions of the Linux operating system come with a current version of  
IPMItool.  
You can view the IMM event log through the Event Log link in the integrated  
management module (IMM) Web interface.  
The following table describes the methods that you can use to view the event logs,  
depending on the condition of the server. The first two conditions generally do not  
require that you restart the server.  
Table 16. Methods for viewing event logs  
Condition  
Action  
The server is not hung and is connected to a Use any of the following methods:  
network.  
v Run Portable or Installable DSA to view  
the event logs or create an output file that  
you can send to service and support.  
v Type the IP address of the IMM and go to  
the Event Log page.  
v Use IPMItool to view the system-event log.  
The server is not hung and is not connected Use IPMItool locally to view the system-event  
to a network.  
log.  
The server is hung.  
v If DSA Preboot is installed, restart the  
server and press F2 to start DSA Preboot  
and view the event logs.  
v If DSA Preboot is not installed, insert the  
DSA Preboot CD and restart the server to  
start DSA Preboot and view the event  
logs.  
v Alternatively, you can restart the server  
and press F1 to start the Setup Utility and  
view the POST event log or system-event  
log. For more information, see “Viewing  
System-event log  
The system-event log contains messages of three types:  
Information  
Information messages do not require action; they record significant  
system-level events, such as when the server is started.  
Warning  
Warning messages do not require immediate action; they indicate possible  
problems, such as when the recommended maximum ambient temperature  
is exceeded.  
Error Error messages might require action; they indicate system errors, such as  
when a fan is not detected.  
Each message contains date and time information, and it indicates the source of  
the message (POST or the IMM).  
144 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
POST error codes  
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of  
the server components and some optional devices in the server. This series of tests  
is called the power-on self-test, or POST.  
If a power-on password is set, you must type the password and press Enter, when  
you are prompted, for POST to run.  
If POST is completed without detecting any problems, the server startup is  
completed.  
If POST detects a problem, an error message is sent to the POST event log.  
The following table describes the POST error codes and suggested actions to  
correct the detected problems. These errors can appear as severe, warning, or  
informational.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
0010002  
Description  
Action  
Microprocessor not supported  
1. Reseat the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor 1  
b. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor 2 (if one is installed)  
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove  
microprocessor 2 and restart the server.  
3. (Trained service technician only) Remove  
microprocessor 1 and install microprocessor 2 in  
the microprocessor 1 connector. Restart the  
server. If the error is corrected, microprocessor 1  
is bad and must be replaced.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor 1  
b. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor 2  
c. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
0011000  
Invalid microprocessor type  
1. Update the firmware (see “Updating the firmware”  
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and  
replace the affected microprocessor (error LED is  
lit) with a supported type.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
0011002  
Microprocessor mismatch  
1. Run the Setup utility and view the microprocessor  
information to compare the installed  
microprocessor specifications.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and  
replace one of the microprocessors so that they  
both match.  
0011004  
Microprocessor failed BIST  
1. Update the firmware (see “Updating the firmware”  
2. (Trained service technician only) Reseat  
microprocessor 2.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
001100A  
0050001  
Microcode update failed  
DIMM disabled  
1. Update the server firmware (see “Updating the  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
microprocessor.  
1. If the server fails the POST memory test, reseat  
the DIMMs.  
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the  
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a  
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA memory test.  
0051003  
Uncorrectable DIMM error  
1. If the server failed the POST memory test, reseat  
the DIMMs.  
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the  
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a  
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA memory test.  
0051006  
DIMM mismatch detected  
Make sure that the DIMMs match and are installed in  
the correct sequence (see “Installing a memory  
146 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
0051009  
No memory detected  
1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs.  
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see  
005100A  
No usable memory detected  
1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs.  
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see  
4. Clear CMOS memory to re-enable all the memory  
connectors.  
0058001  
0058007  
PFA threshold exceeded  
1. Update the firmware (see“Updating the firmware”  
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run the memory test.  
3. Replace the failing DIMM, which is indicated by a  
lit LED on the system board.  
DIMM population is unsupported  
1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.  
2. Remove the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those  
that are identified, replace it with an identical pair  
of known good DIMMs, and then restart the  
server. Repeat as necessary. If the failures  
continue, go to step 4.  
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to  
their original connectors, restarting the server  
after each pair, until a pair fails. Replace the  
DIMMs in the failed pair with identical known  
good DIMMs, restarting the server after each  
DIMM is installed. Replace the failed DIMM.  
Repeat this step until you have tested all  
removed DIMMs.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
0058008  
DIMM failed memory test  
1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.  
2. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. DIMMs  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
00580A1  
00580A4  
Invalid DIMM population for mirroring mode  
Memory population changed  
1. If a fault LED is lit, resolve the failure.  
2. Install the DIMMs in the correct sequence (see  
Information only. Memory has been added, moved, or  
changed.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
00580A5  
Mirror failover complete  
Information only. Memory redundancy has been lost.  
Check the event log for uncorrected DIMM failure  
events.  
0068002  
CMOS battery cleared  
1. Reseat the battery.  
2. Clear the CMOS memory (see “System-board  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Battery  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
2011000  
PCI-X PERR  
1. Check the extender card LEDs.  
2. Reseat all affected adapters and extender cards.  
3. Update the PCI device firmware.  
4. Remove the adapters from the extender card.  
5. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Extender card  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
2011001  
PCI-X SERR  
1. Check the extender-card LEDs.  
2. Reseat all affected adapters and extender cards.  
3. Update the PCI device firmware.  
4. Remove the adapters from the extender card.  
5. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Extender card  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
2018001  
PCI Express uncorrected or uncorrected  
error  
1. Check the extender-card LEDs.  
2. Reseat all affected adapters and extender cards.  
3. Update the PCI device firmware.  
4. Remove both adapters from the extender card.  
5. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Extender card  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
148 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
2018002  
Option ROM resource allocation failure  
Informational message that some devices might not  
be initialized.  
1. If possible, rearrange the order of the adapters in  
the PCI slots to change the load order of the  
optional-device ROM code.  
2. Run the Setup utility, select Start Options, and  
change the boot priority to change the load order  
of the optional-device ROM code.  
3. Run the Setup utility and disable some other  
resources, if their functions are not being used, to  
make more space available. Select Devices and  
I/O Ports to disable any of the integrated devices.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Each adapter  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
3xx0007 (xx  
can be 00 - 19)  
Firmware fault detected, system halted  
1. Recover the server firmware to the latest level.  
2. Undo any recent configuration changes, or clear  
CMOS memory to restore the settings to the  
default values.  
3. Remove any recently installed hardware.  
3038003  
Firmware corrupted  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings to recover the  
server firmware.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
3048005  
3048006  
Booted secondary (backup) server firmware Information only. The backup switch was used to boot  
image  
the secondary bank.  
Booted secondary (backup) server firmware  
image because of ABR  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings to recover the  
primary server firmware settings.  
2. Turn off the server and remove it from the power  
source.  
3. Reconnect the server to the power source, and  
then turn on the server.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
305000A  
RTC date/time is incorrect  
1. Adjust the date and time settings in the Setup  
utility, and then restart the server.  
2. Reseat the battery.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Battery  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
3058001  
System configuration invalid  
1. Run the Setup utility, and select Save Settings.  
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
3. Reseat the following components one at a time in  
the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. Battery  
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, it must  
be reseated by a trained service technician  
only)  
4. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Battery  
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, it must  
be replaced by a trained service technician  
only)  
c. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
3058004  
Three boot failures  
1. Undo any recent system changes, such as new  
settings or newly installed devices.  
2. Make sure that the server is attached to a reliable  
power source.  
3. Remove all hardware that is not listed on the  
ServerProven Web site.  
4. Make sure that the operating system is not  
corrupted.  
5. Run the Setup utility, save the configuration, and  
then restart the server.  
3108007  
3138002  
System configuration restored to default  
settings  
Information only. This is message is usually  
associated with the CMOS battery clear event.  
Boot configuration error  
1. Remove any recent configuration changes that  
you made in the Setup utility.  
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
150 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
3808000  
IMM communication failure  
1. Remove power from the server for 30 seconds,  
and then reconnect the server to power and  
restart it.  
2. Update the IMM firmware.  
3. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
3808002  
3808003  
3808004  
Error updating system configuration to IMM  
1. Remove power from the server, and then  
reconnect the server to power and restart it.  
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.  
3. Update the firmware.  
Error retrieving system configuration from  
IMM  
1. Remove power from the server, and then  
reconnect the server to power and restart it.  
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.  
3. Update the IMM firmware.  
IMM system event log full  
v When out-of-band, use the IMM Web interface or  
IPMItool to clear the logs from the operating  
system.  
v When using the local console:  
1. Run the Setup utility.  
2. Select System Event Logs.  
3. Select Clear System Event Log.  
4. Restart the server.  
3818001  
3818002  
3818003  
3818004  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
update failed  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
update aborted  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
flash lock failed  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
system error  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
3818005  
Current Bank Core Root of Trust  
Measurement (CRTM) capsule signature  
invalid  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
3818006  
3818007  
Opposite bank CRTM capsule signature  
invalid  
1. Switch the firmware bank to the backup bank.  
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
3. Switch the bank back to the current bank.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
CRTM update capsule signature invalid  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Integrated management module error messages  
The following table describes the IMM error messages and suggested actions to  
correct the detected problems. For more information about IMM, see the IMM  
User’s Guide on the Web.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Message  
Severity  
Description  
Action  
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp going Error  
high (upper critical) has asserted.  
An upper critical sensor  
going high has asserted.  
Reduce the ambient temperature.  
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp going Error  
high (upper non-recoverable) has  
asserted.  
An upper nonrecoverable  
sensor going high has  
asserted.  
Reduce the ambient temperature.  
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3 V going  
low (lower critical) has asserted.  
Error  
A lower critical sensor going (Trained service technician only)  
low has asserted.  
Replace the system board.  
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3 V going  
high (upper critical) has asserted.  
Error  
An upper critical sensor  
going high has asserted.  
(Trained service technician only)  
Replace the system board.  
Numeric sensor Planar 5 V going low Error  
(lower critical) has asserted.  
A lower critical sensor going (Trained service technician only)  
low has asserted.  
Replace the system board.  
Numeric sensor Planar 5 V going  
high (upper critical) has asserted.  
Error  
An upper critical sensor  
going high has asserted.  
(Trained service technician only)  
Replace the system board.  
152 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Numeric sensor Planar 12 V going  
low (lower critical) has asserted.  
Error  
Error  
Error  
Error  
A lower critical sensor going Check the power-supply LED.  
low has asserted.  
Numeric sensor Planar 12 V going  
high (upper critical) has asserted.  
An upper critical sensor  
going high has asserted.  
Check the power-supply LED.  
Numeric sensor Planar VBAT going  
low (lower critical) has asserted.  
A lower critical sensor going Replace the 3 V battery.  
low has asserted.  
Numeric sensor Fan n Tach going  
low (lower critical) has asserted.  
(n = fan number)  
A lower critical sensor going  
low has asserted.  
1. Reseat the failing fan n, which  
is indicated by a lit LED on  
the fan.  
2. Replace the failing fan.  
(n = fan number)  
The Processor CPU nStatus has  
Failed with IERR.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Error  
A processor failed - IERR  
condition has occurred.  
1. Make sure that the latest  
levels of firmware and device  
drivers are installed for all  
adapters and standard  
devices, such as Ethernet,  
SCSI, and SAS.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
2. Run the DSA program for the  
hard disk drives and other I/O  
devices.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
An Over-Temperature Condition has Error  
been detected on the Processor CPU  
nStatus.  
An overtemperature  
condition has occurred for  
microprocessor n.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow,  
that the air baffle is in place  
and correctly installed, and  
that the server cover is  
installed and completely  
closed.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
(n = microprocessor number)  
2. Make sure that the heat sink  
for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
The Processor CPU n Status has  
Failed with FRB1/BIST condition.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Error  
A processor failed -  
FRB1/BIST condition has  
occurred.  
1. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
2. Make sure that the installed  
microprocessors are  
compatible with each other  
on page 101 for information  
about microprocessor  
requirements).  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Reseat microprocessor  
n.  
4. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
154 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
The Processor CPU n Status has a  
Configuration Mismatch.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Error  
A processor configuration  
mismatch has occurred.  
1. Make sure that the installed  
microprocessors are  
compatible with each other  
on page 101 for information  
about microprocessor  
requirements).  
2. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the  
incompatible microprocessor.  
An SM BIOS Uncorrectable CPU  
complex error for Processor CPU n  
Status has asserted.  
Error  
An SMBIOS uncorrectable  
CPU complex error has  
asserted.  
1. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
2. Make sure that the installed  
microprocessors are  
compatible with each other  
on page 101 for information  
about microprocessor  
requirements).  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Reseat microprocessor  
n.  
4. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Sensor CPU n OverTemp has  
transitioned to critical from a less  
severe state.  
Error  
Error  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow,  
that the air baffle is in place  
and correctly installed, and  
that the server cover is  
installed and completely  
closed.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
2. Make sure that the heat sink  
for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Sensor CPU n OverTemp has  
transitioned to non-recoverable from  
a less severe state.  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state from a  
less severe state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow,  
that the air baffle is in place  
and correctly installed, and  
that the server cover is  
installed and completely  
closed.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
2. Make sure that the heat sink  
for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Sensor CPU n OverTemp has  
transitioned to critical from a  
non-recoverable state.  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow,  
that the air baffle is in place  
and correctly installed, and  
that the server cover is  
installed and completely  
closed.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
2. Make sure that the heat sink  
for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
156 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Sensor CPU n OverTemp has  
transitioned to non-recoverable.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow,  
that the air baffle is in place  
and correctly installed, and  
that the server cover is  
installed and completely  
closed.  
2. Make sure that the heat sink  
for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
A diagnostic interrupt has occurred  
on system %1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
An operator information  
panel NMI/diagnostic  
interrupt has occurred.  
If the NMI button on the system  
board has not been pressed, do  
the following:  
1. Make sure that the NMI  
button is not pressed.  
2. Replace the operator  
information panel cable.  
3. Replace the operator  
information panel.  
A bus timeout has occurred on  
system %1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
A bus timeout has occurred.  
1. Remove the adapter from the  
PCI slot that is indicated by a  
lit LED.  
2. Replace the extender card.  
3. Remove all PCI adapters.  
4. (Trained service technicians  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
A software NMI has occurred on  
system %1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
A software NMI has  
occurred.  
1. Check the device driver.  
2. Reinstall the device driver.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
The System %1 encountered a  
POST Error.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
A POST error has occurred.  
(Sensor = ABR Status)  
1. Recover the server firmware  
from the backup page (see  
2. Update the server firmware to  
the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
The System %1 encountered a  
POST Error.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
A POST error has occurred.  
(Sensor = Firmware Error)  
1. Update the server firmware  
on the primary page.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
2. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has  
occurred on system %1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
A bus uncorrectable error  
has occurred.  
(Sensor = Critical Int PCI)  
1. Check the system-event log.  
2. Check the PCI error LEDs.  
3. Remove the adapter from the  
indicated PCI slot.  
4. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
5. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
158 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has  
occurred on system %1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
A bus uncorrectable error  
has occurred.  
(Sensor = Critical Int CPU)  
1. Check the system-event log.  
2. Check the microprocessor  
error LEDs.  
3. Remove the failing  
microprocessor from the  
system board.  
4. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
5. Make sure that the two  
microprocessors are  
matching.  
6. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has  
occurred on system %1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
A bus uncorrectable error  
has occurred.  
(Sensor = Critical Int DIM)  
1. Check the system-event log.  
2. Check the DIMM error LEDs.  
3. Remove the failing DIMM  
from the system board.  
4. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
5. Make sure that the installed  
DIMMs are supported and  
configured correctly.  
6. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Sensor Sys Board Fault has  
transitioned to critical from a less  
severe state.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
1. Check the system-event log.  
2. Check for an error LED on  
the system board.  
3. Replace any failing device.  
4. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
5. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
The Power Supply (Power Supply: n) Error  
has Failed.  
(n = power supply number)  
Power supply n has failed.  
(n = power supply number)  
1. If the power-on LED is lit, do  
the following:  
a. Reduce the server to the  
minimum configuration.  
b. Reinstall the components  
one at a time, restarting  
the server each time.  
c. If the error recurs, replace  
the component that you  
just reinstalled.  
2. Reseat power supply n.  
3. Replace power supply n.  
(n = power supply number)  
Sensor PS n Fan Fault has  
transitioned to critical from a less  
severe state.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
1. Make sure that there are no  
obstructions, such as bundled  
cables, to the airflow from the  
power-supply fan.  
(n = power supply number)  
2. Replace power supply n.  
(n = power supply number)  
160 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Sensor Pwr Rail A Fault has  
transitioned to non-recoverable.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Turn off the server and  
disconnect it from power.  
2. (Trained service technician  
only) Remove the PCI  
adapter and microprocessor  
1. Reinstall the  
microprocessor in socket 1  
and restart the server.  
3. Restart the server.  
4. Reinstall each device, one at  
a time, starting the server  
each time to isolate the failing  
device.  
5. Replace the failing device.  
6. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Sensor Pwr Rail B Fault has  
transitioned to non-recoverable.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Turn off the server and  
disconnect it from power.  
2. (Trained service technician  
only) Remove the PCI  
adapter and microprocessor  
2.  
3. Restart the server.  
4. Reinstall each device, one at  
a time, starting the server  
each time to isolate the failing  
device.  
5. Replace the failing device.  
6. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Sensor Pwr Rail C Fault has  
transitioned to non-recoverable.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Turn off the server and  
disconnect it from power.  
2. Remove the hard disk drives,  
hard disk drive backplanes,  
and DIMMs in connectors 1  
through 8.  
3. Restart the server.  
4. Reinstall each device, one at  
a time, starting the server  
each time to isolate the failing  
device.  
5. Replace the failing device.  
6. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Sensor Pwr Rail D Fault has  
transitioned to non-recoverable.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Turn off the server and  
disconnect it from power.  
2. Remove the optical drive and  
the DIMMs in connectors 9  
through 16.  
3. Restart the server.  
4. Reinstall the microprocessor  
in socket 1 and restart the  
server.  
5. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the failing  
microprocessor.  
6. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Sensor Pwr Rail E Fault has  
transitioned to non-recoverable.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Turn off the server and  
disconnect it from power.  
2. (Trained service technician  
only) Remove the optical  
drive and the PCI adapter.  
3. Restart the server.  
4. Reinstall each device, one at  
a time, starting the server  
each time to isolate the failing  
device.  
5. Replace the failing device.  
6. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Sensor Pwr Rail F Fault has  
transitioned to non-recoverable.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Turn off the server and  
disconnect it from power.  
2. Remove the hard disk drives  
and the hard disk drive  
backplanes.  
3. Restart the server.  
4. Reinstall each device, one at  
a time, starting the server  
each time to isolate the failing  
device.  
5. Replace the failing device.  
6. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
162 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Sensor PS n Therm Fault has  
transitioned to critical from a less  
severe state.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
1. Make sure that there are no  
obstructions, such as bundled  
cables, to the airflow from the  
power-supply fan.  
(n = power supply number)  
2. Replace power supply n.  
(n = power supply number)  
Sensor PS n 12 V OV Fault has  
transitioned to non-recoverable.  
(n = power supply number)  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Check the power-supply LED.  
2. Remove the power supplies.  
3. Replace power supply n.  
4. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
(n = power supply number)  
Sensor PS n 12 V UV Fault has  
transitioned to non-recoverable.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Check the power-supply LED.  
2. Remove the power supplies.  
3. Replace power supply n.  
4. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
(n = power supply number)  
Sensor PS n 12 V OC Fault has  
transitioned to non-recoverable.  
(n = power supply number)  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Check the power-supply LED.  
2. Remove the power supplies.  
3. Replace power supply n.  
4. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
(n = power supply number)  
Sensor PS n VCO Fault has  
transitioned to non-recoverable.  
(n = power supply number)  
Error  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Check the power-supply LED.  
2. Replace the failing power  
supply.  
(n = power supply number)  
Redundancy Power Unit has been  
reduced.  
Redundancy has been lost  
and is insufficient to continue  
operation.  
1. Check the LEDs for both  
power supplies.  
2. Follow the actions in  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Redundancy Cooling Zone 1 has  
been reduced.  
Error  
Error  
Error  
Redundancy has been lost  
and is insufficient to continue  
operation.  
1. Make sure that the connector  
on fan 1 and fan 4 (if  
installed) is not damaged.  
2. Make sure that the fan  
connectors on the system  
board are not damaged.  
3. Make sure that the fan cage  
is correctly installed.  
4. Reseat the fan.  
5. Replace the fan.  
Redundancy Cooling Zone 2 has  
been reduced.  
Redundancy has been lost  
and is insufficient to continue  
operation.  
1. Make sure that the connector  
on fan 2 and fan 5 (if  
installed) is not damaged.  
2. Make sure that the fan  
connectors on the system  
board are not damaged.  
3. Make sure that the fan cage  
is correctly installed.  
4. Reseat the fan.  
5. Replace the fan.  
Redundancy Cooling Zone 3 has  
been reduced.  
Redundancy has been lost  
and is insufficient to continue  
operation.  
1. Make sure that the connector  
on fan 3 and fan 6 (if  
installed) is not damaged.  
2. Make sure that the fan  
connectors on the system  
board are not damaged.  
3. Make sure that the fan cage  
is correctly installed.  
4. Reseat the fan.  
5. Replace the fan.  
Sensor RAID Error has transitioned  
to critical from a less severe state.  
Error  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
1. Check the hard disk drive  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the hard disk drive for  
which the status LED is lit.  
3. Replace the defective hard  
disk drive.  
The Drive n Status has been  
removed from unit Drive 0 Status.  
(n = hard disk drive number)  
A drive has been removed.  
Reseat hard disk drive n.  
(n = hard disk drive number)  
164 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
The Drive n Status has been  
disabled due to a detected fault.  
(n = hard disk drive number)  
Error  
A drive has been disabled  
because of a fault.  
1. Run the hard disk drive  
diagnostic test on drive n.  
2. Reseat the following  
components:  
a. Hard disk drive  
b. Cable from the system  
board to the backplane  
3. Replace the following  
components one at a time, in  
the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Hard disk drive  
b. Cable from the system  
board to the backplane  
c. Hard disk drive backplane  
(n = hard disk drive number)  
Array %1 is in critical condition.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Error  
Error  
An array is in Critical state.  
(Sensor = Drive n Status)  
(n = hard disk drive number)  
Replace the hard disk drive that  
is indicated by a lit status LED.  
Array %1 has failed.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
An array is in Failed state.  
(Sensor = Drive n Status)  
(n = hard disk drive number)  
Replace the hard disk drive that  
is indicated by a lit status LED.  
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error  
for DIMM All DIMMs on Memory  
Subsystem All DIMMs.  
A memory uncorrectable  
error has occurred.  
1. If the server failed the POST  
memory test, reseat the  
DIMMs.  
2. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Note: You do not have to  
replace DIMMs by pairs.  
3. Run the Setup utility to enable  
all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA memory test.  
Memory Logging Limit Reached for  
DIMM All DIMMs on Memory  
Subsystem All DIMMs.  
Error  
The memory logging limit  
has been reached.  
1. Update the server firmware to  
the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run  
the DSA memory test.  
3. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Memory DIMM Configuration Error  
for All DIMMs on Memory Subsystem  
All DIMMs.  
Error  
A DIMM configuration error  
has occurred.  
Make sure that DIMMs are  
installed in the correct sequence  
and have the same size, type,  
speed, and technology.  
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error  
for DIMM One of the DIMMs on  
Memory Subsystem One of the  
DIMMs.  
A memory uncorrectable  
error has occurred.  
1. If the server failed the POST  
memory test, reseat the  
DIMMs.  
2. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Note: You do not have to  
replace DIMMs by pairs.  
3. Run the Setup utility to enable  
all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA memory test.  
Memory Logging Limit Reached for  
DIMM One of the DIMMs on Memory  
Subsystem One of the DIMMs.  
Error  
The memory logging limit  
has been reached.  
1. Update the server firmware to  
the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run  
the DSA memory test.  
3. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Memory DIMM Configuration Error  
for One of the DIMMs on Memory  
Subsystem One of the DIMMs.  
Error  
A DIMM configuration error  
has occurred.  
Make sure that DIMMs are  
installed in the correct sequence  
and have the same size, type,  
speed, and technology.  
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error  
for DIMM n Status on Memory  
Subsystem DIMM n Status.  
A memory uncorrectable  
error has occurred.  
1. If the server failed the POST  
memory test, reseat the  
DIMMs.  
(n = DIMM number)  
2. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Note: You do not have to  
replace DIMMs by pairs.  
3. Run the Setup utility to enable  
all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA memory test.  
5. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
166 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Memory Logging Limit Reached for  
DIMM nStatus on Memory  
Subsystem DIMMnStatus.  
(n = DIMM number)  
Error  
The memory logging limit  
has been reached.  
1. Update the server firmware to  
the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run  
the DSA memory test.  
3. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Memory DIMM Configuration Error  
for DIMM n Status on Memory  
Subsystem DIMM n Status.  
(n = DIMM number)  
Error  
Error  
A DIMM configuration error  
has occurred.  
Make sure that DIMMs are  
installed in the correct sequence  
and have the same size, type,  
speed, and technology.  
Sensor DIMM n Temp has  
transitioned to critical from a less  
severe state.  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow,  
that the air baffles are in  
place and correctly installed,  
and that the server cover is  
installed and completely  
closed.  
(n = DIMM number)  
2. If a fan has failed, complete  
the action for a fan failure.  
3. Replace DIMM n.  
(n = DIMM number)  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
A PCI PERR has occurred on system Error  
%1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
A PCI PERR has occurred.  
(Sensor = PCI Slot n; n =  
PCI slot number)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and extender card.  
3. Update the server and  
adapter firmware (UEFI and  
IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
4. Remove the adapter from slot  
n.  
5. Replace the PCI.  
6. Replace extender card n.  
(n = PCI slot number)  
A PCI SERR has occurred on system Error  
%1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
A PCI SERR has occurred.  
(Sensor = PCI Slot n; n =  
PCI slot number)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and extender card.  
3. Update the server and  
adapter firmware (UEFI and  
IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
4. Remove the adapter from slot  
n.  
5. Replace the PCI.  
6. Replace extender card n.  
(n = PCI slot number)  
168 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
A PCI PERR has occurred on system Error  
%1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
A PCI PERR has occurred.  
(Sensor = One of PCI Err)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and riser card.  
3. Update the server and  
adapter firmware (UEFI and  
IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
4. Remove both adapters.  
5. Replace the PCI.  
6. Replace the extender card.  
7. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
A PCI SERR has occurred on system Error  
%1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
A PCI SERR has occurred.  
(Sensor = One of PCI Err)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and extender card.  
3. Update the server and  
adapter firmware (UEFI and  
IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
4. Remove both adapters.  
5. Replace the PCI.  
6. Replace the extender card.  
7. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Fault in slot System board on system Error  
%1.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and extender card.  
3. Update the server and  
adapter firmware (UEFI and  
IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
4. Remove both adapters.  
5. Replace the PCI.  
6. Replace the extender card.  
7. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Redundancy Backup Mem Status  
has been reduced.  
Error  
Redundancy has been lost  
and is insufficient to continue  
operation.  
1. Check the system-event log  
for DIMM failure events  
(uncorrectable or PFA) and  
correct the failures.  
2. Re-enable mirroring in the  
Setup utility.  
IMM Network Initialization Complete. Info  
An IMM network has  
No action; information only.  
completed initialization.  
Certificate Authority %1 has detected Error  
a %2 Certificate Error.  
A problem has occurred with  
the SSL Server, SSL Client,  
or SSL Trusted CA certificate  
that has been imported into  
the IMM. The imported  
certificate must contain a  
public key that corresponds  
to the key pair that was  
previously generated by the  
Generate a New Key and  
Certificate Signing  
1. Make sure that the certificate  
that you are importing is  
correct.  
2. Try importing the certificate  
again.  
Request link.  
Ethernet Data Rate modified from %1 Info  
to %2 by user %3.  
A user has modified the  
Ethernet port data rate.  
No action; information only.  
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.Speed;  
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.Speed;  
%3 = user ID)  
170 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Ethernet Duplex setting modified  
from %1 to %2 by user %3.  
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex;  
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex;  
%3 = user ID)  
Info  
Info  
A user has modified the  
Ethernet port duplex setting.  
No action; information only.  
No action; information only.  
Ethernet MTU setting modified from  
%1 to %2 by user %3.  
A user has modified the  
Ethernet port MTU setting.  
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.  
ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit;  
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.  
ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit; %3  
= user ID)  
Ethernet Duplex setting modified  
from %1 to %2 by user %3.  
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.  
NetworkAddresses;  
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.  
NetworkAddresses;  
Info  
A user has modified the  
Ethernet port MAC address  
setting.  
No action; information only.  
No action; information only.  
%3 = user ID)  
Ethernet interface %1 by user %2.  
(%1 =  
CIM_EthernetPort.EnabledState;  
%2 = user ID)  
Info  
Info  
Info  
A user has enabled or  
disabled the Ethernet  
interface.  
Hostname set to %1 by user %2.  
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.  
Hostname;  
A user has modified the host No action; information only.  
name of the IMM.  
%2 = user ID)  
IP address of network interface  
modified from %1 to %2 by user %3.  
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.  
IPv4Address;  
A user has modified the IP  
address of the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
%2 = CIM_StaticIPAssignment  
SettingData.IPAddress;  
%3 = user ID)  
IP subnet mask of network interface Info  
modified from %1 to %2 by user  
%3s.  
A user has modified the IP  
subnet mask of the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.  
SubnetMask;  
%2 = CIM_StaticIPAssignment  
SettingData.SubnetMask;  
%3 = user ID)  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
IP address of default gateway  
modified from %1 to %2 by user  
%3s.  
Info  
A user has modified the  
default gateway IP address  
of the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.  
GatewayIPv4Address;  
%2 = CIM_StaticIPAssignment  
SettingData.  
DefaultGatewayAddress;  
%3 = user ID)  
OS Watchdog response %1 by %2.  
(%1 = Enabled or Disabled; %2 =  
user ID)  
Info  
Info  
A user has enabled or  
disabled an OS Watchdog.  
No action; information only.  
DHCP[%1] failure, no IP address  
assigned.  
(%1 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
A DHCP server has failed to  
assign an IP address to the  
IMM.  
1. Make sure that the network  
cable is connected.  
2. Make sure that there is a  
DHCP server on the network  
that can assign an IP address  
to the IMM.  
Remote Login Successful. Login ID: Info  
%1 from %2 at IP address %3.  
(%1 = user ID; %2 =  
A user has successfully  
logged in to the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
ValueMap(CIM_ProtocolEndpoint.  
ProtocolIFType; %3 = IP address,  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
Attempting to %1 server %2 by user Info  
%3.  
A user has used the IMM to No action; information only.  
perform a power function on  
the server.  
Security: Userid: ’%1’ had %2 login  
failures from WEB client at IP  
address %3.  
Error  
A user has exceeded the  
maximum number of  
unsuccessful login attempts  
1. Make sure that the correct  
login ID and password are  
being used.  
(%1 = user ID; %2 =  
from a Web browser and has  
2. Have the system  
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures  
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);  
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
been prevented from logging  
administrator reset the login  
in for the lockout period.  
ID or password.  
Security: Login ID: ’%1’ had %2 login Error  
failures from CLI at %3.  
(%1 = user ID; %2 =  
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures  
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);  
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
A user has exceeded the  
maximum number of  
unsuccessful login attempts  
1. Make sure that the correct  
login ID and password are  
being used.  
from the command-line  
2. Have the system  
interface and has been  
administrator reset the login  
prevented from logging in for  
ID or password.  
the lockout period.  
Remote access attempt failed. Invalid Error  
userid or password received. Userid  
is ’%1’ from WEB browser at IP  
address %2.  
(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP address,  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
A user has attempted to log  
1. Make sure that the correct  
in from a Web browser by  
login ID and password are  
using an invalid login ID or  
being used.  
password.  
2. Have the system  
administrator reset the login  
ID or password.  
172 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Remote access attempt failed. Invalid Error  
userid or password received. Userid  
is ’%1’ from TELNET client at IP  
address %2.  
(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP address,  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
A user has attempted to log  
in from a Telnet session by  
using an invalid login ID or  
password.  
1. Make sure that the correct  
login ID and password are  
being used.  
2. Have the system  
administrator reset the login  
ID or password.  
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on  
system %1 cleared by user %2.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName; %2 = user ID)  
Info  
A user has cleared the IMM No action; information only.  
event log.  
IMM reset was initiated by user %1. Info  
(%1 = user ID)  
A user has initiated a reset  
of the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
No action; information only.  
ENET[0] DHCP-HSTN=%1, DN=%2, Info  
IP@=%3, SN=%4, GW@=%5,  
DNS1@=%6.  
The DHCP server has  
assigned an IMM IP address  
and configuration.  
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.  
Hostname; %2 =  
CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.  
DomainName; %3 =  
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.  
IPv4Address; %4 =  
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.  
SubnetMask; %5 = IP address,  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx; %6 = IP address,  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
ENET[0] IP-Cfg:HstName=%1,  
IP@%2, NetMsk=%3, GW@=%4.  
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.  
Hostname; %2 =  
Info  
An IMM IP address and  
configuration have been  
assigned using client data.  
No action; information only.  
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.  
IPv4Address; %3 =  
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.  
SubnetMask; %4 =  
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.  
DefaultGatewayAddress)  
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is no  
longer active.  
Info  
Info  
Info  
The IMM Ethernet interface  
has been disabled.  
No action; information only.  
No action; information only.  
No action; information only.  
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is now  
active.  
The IMM Ethernet interface  
has been enabled.  
DHCP setting changed to by user  
%1.  
A user has changed the  
DHCP mode.  
(%1 = user ID)  
IMM: Configuration %1 restored from Info  
a configuration file by user %2.  
A user has restored the IMM No action; information only.  
configuration by importing a  
(%1 = CIM_ConfigurationData.  
configuration file.  
ConfigurationName; %2 = user ID)  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Watchdog %1 Screen Capture  
Occurred.  
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader  
Watchdog)  
Error  
An operating-system error  
has occurred, and the  
screen capture was  
successful.  
1. Reconfigure the watchdog  
timer to a higher value.  
2. Make sure that the IMM  
Ethernet over USB interface  
is enabled.  
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or  
cdc_ether device driver for  
the operating system.  
4. Disable the watchdog.  
5. Check the integrity of the  
installed operating system.  
Watchdog %1 Failed to Capture  
Screen.  
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader  
Watchdog)  
Error  
An operating-system error  
has occurred, and the  
screen capture failed.  
1. Reconfigure the watchdog  
timer to a higher value.  
2. Make sure that the IMM  
Ethernet over USB interface  
is enabled.  
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or  
cdc_ether device driver for  
the operating system.  
4. Disable the watchdog.  
5. Check the integrity of the  
installed operating system.  
6. Update the IMM firmware.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code is  
supported for the cluster  
solution before you update  
the code.  
Running the backup IMM main  
application.  
Error  
The IMM has resorted to  
running the backup main  
application.  
Update the IMM firmware.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of a  
cluster solution, verify that the  
latest level of code is supported  
for the cluster solution before you  
update the code.  
174 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Please ensure that the IMM is  
flashed with the correct firmware. The  
IMM is unable to match its firmware  
to the server.  
Error  
The server does not support Update the IMM firmware to a  
the installed IMM firmware  
version.  
version that the server supports.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of a  
cluster solution, verify that the  
latest level of code is supported  
for the cluster solution before you  
update the code.  
IMM reset was caused by restoring  
default values.  
Info  
The IMM has been reset  
because a user has restored  
the configuration to its  
default settings.  
No action; information only.  
IMM clock has been set from NTP  
server %1.  
Info  
The IMM clock has been set No action; information only.  
to the date and time that is  
provided by the Network  
Time Protocol server.  
SSL data in the IMM configuration  
data is invalid. Clearing configuration  
data region and disabling SSL+H25.  
Error  
There is a problem with the  
certificate that has been  
1. Make sure that the certificate  
that you are importing is  
imported into the IMM. The  
correct.  
imported certificate must  
2. Try to import the certificate  
contain a public key that  
again.  
corresponds to the key pair  
that was previously  
generated through the  
Generate a New Key and  
Certificate Signing  
Request link.  
Flash of %1 from %2 succeeded for Info  
user %3.  
(%1 = CIM_ManagedElement.  
ElementName;  
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI;  
%3 = user ID)  
A user has successfully  
updated one of the following  
firmware components:  
No action; information only.  
v IMM main application  
v IMM boot ROM  
v Server firmware  
v Diagnostics  
v Integrated service  
processor  
Flash of %1 from %2 failed for user  
%3.  
(%1 = CIM_ManagedElement.  
ElementName;  
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI;  
%3 = user ID)  
Info  
Info  
An attempt to update a  
firmware component from  
the interface and IP address  
has failed.  
Try to update the firmware again.  
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on  
system %1 is 75% full.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
The IMM event log is 75%  
full. When the log is full,  
older log entries are  
To avoid losing older log entries,  
save the log as a text file and  
clear the log.  
replaced by newer ones.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Parts Listingsection in the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are  
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on  
system %1 is 100% full.  
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.  
ElementName)  
Info  
The IMM event log is full.  
When the log is full, older  
log entries are replaced by  
newer ones.  
To avoid losing older log entries,  
save the log as a text file and  
clear the log.  
%1 Platform Watchdog Timer expired Error  
for %2.  
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader  
Watchdog; %2 = OS Watchdog or  
Loader Watchdog)  
A Platform Watchdog Timer  
Expired event has occurred.  
1. Reconfigure the watchdog  
timer to a higher value.  
2. Make sure that the IMM  
Ethernet over USB interface  
is enabled.  
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or  
cdc_ether device driver for  
the operating system.  
4. Disable the watchdog.  
5. Check the integrity of the  
installed operating system.  
IMM Test Alert Generated by %1.  
(%1 = user ID)  
Info  
A user has generated a test No action; information only.  
alert from the IMM.  
Security: Userid: ’%1’ had %2 login  
failures from an SSH client at IP  
address %3.  
Error  
A user has exceeded the  
maximum number of  
unsuccessful login attempts  
1. Make sure that the correct  
login ID and password are  
being used.  
(%1 = user ID; %2 =  
from SSH and has been  
2. Have the system  
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures  
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);  
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
prevented from logging in for  
administrator reset the login  
the lockout period.  
ID or password.  
Diagnostic programs, messages, and error codes  
The diagnostic programs are the primary method of testing the major components  
of the server. As you run the diagnostic programs, text messages and error codes  
are displayed on the screen and are saved in the test log. A diagnostic text  
message or error code indicates that a problem has been detected; to determine  
what action you should take as a result of a message or error code, see the  
diagnostics messages in the Hardware Maintenance Manual.  
Running the diagnostic programs  
To run the diagnostic programs, do the following:  
1. If the server is running, turn off the server and all attached devices.  
2. Turn on all attached devices; then, turn on the server.  
3. When the prompt Press F2 for Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) is displayed,  
press F2.  
Note: The DSA preboot diagnostics program might appear to be unresponsive  
for an unusual length of time when you start the program. This is normal  
operation while the program loads.  
4. Optionally, select Quit to DSA to exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic  
program.  
176 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: After you exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic environment, you  
must restart the server to access the stand-alone memory diagnostic  
environment again.  
5. Select gui to display the graphical user interface, or select cmd to display the  
DSA interactive menu.  
6. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the diagnostic test to run.  
If the diagnostic programs do not detect any hardware errors but the problem  
remains during normal server operations, a software error might be the cause. If  
you suspect a software problem, see the information that comes with your software.  
A single problem might cause more than one error message. When this happens,  
correct the cause of the first error message. The other error messages usually will  
not occur the next time you run the diagnostic programs.  
Exception: If multiple error codes indicate a microprocessor error, the error might  
be in a microprocessor or in a microprocessor socket. See “Microprocessor  
problems” on page 134 for information about diagnosing microprocessor problems.  
If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server and try  
running the diagnostic programs again. If the problem remains, replace the  
component that was being tested when the server stopped.  
Diagnostic text messages  
Diagnostic text messages are displayed while the tests are running. A diagnostic  
text message contains one of the following results:  
Passed: The test was completed without any errors.  
Failed: The test detected an error.  
User Aborted: You stopped the test before it was completed.  
Not Applicable: You attempted to test a device that is not present in the server.  
Aborted: The test could not proceed because of the server configuration.  
Warning: The test could not be run. There was no failure of the hardware that was  
being tested, but there might be a hardware failure elsewhere, or another problem  
prevented the test from running; for example, there might be a configuration  
problem, or the hardware might be missing or is not being recognized.  
The result is followed by an error code or other additional information about the  
error.  
Viewing the test log  
To view the DSA log when the tests are completed, select Utility from the top of the  
screen and then select View Test Log. To view a detailed test log, press Tab while  
you view the DSA log. The DSA log data is maintained only while you are running  
the diagnostic programs. When you exit from the diagnostic programs, the DSA log  
is cleared.  
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To save the DSA log to a file on a diskette or to the hard disk, click Save Log on  
the diagnostic programs screen and specify a location and name for the saved log  
file.  
Notes:  
1. To create and use a diskette, you must add an optional external diskette drive to  
the server.  
2. To save the test log to a diskette, you must use a diskette that you have  
formatted yourself; this function does not work with pre-formatted diskettes. If  
the diskette has sufficient space for the test log, the diskette can contain other  
data.  
Diagnostics messages  
The table that describes the messages that the diagnostic programs might generate  
and suggested actions to correct the detected problems is located in the Hardware  
Maintenance Manual.  
178 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance  
If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information  
about Lenovo products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from  
Lenovo to assist you. This section contains information about where to go for  
additional information about Lenovo and Lenovo products, what to do if you  
experience a problem with your system, and whom to call for service, if it is  
necessary.  
Before you call  
Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the  
problem yourself:  
v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.  
v Check the power switches to make sure that the system and any optional  
devices are turned on.  
v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation, and use the  
diagnostic tools that come with your system. Information about diagnostic tools is  
in the Hardware Maintenance Manual.  
v Go to the at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by using the information  
available on the Lenovo support site or by following the troubleshooting procedures  
that Lenovo provides in the documentation that is provided with your Lenovo  
product. The documentation that comes with Lenovo systems also describes the  
diagnostic tests that you can perform. Most systems, operating systems, and  
programs come with documentation that contains troubleshooting procedures and  
explanations of error messages and error codes. If you suspect a software problem,  
see the documentation for the operating system or program.  
Using the documentation  
Information about your Lenovo system and preinstalled software, if any, or optional  
device is available in the documentation that comes with the product. That  
documentation can include printed documents, online documents, readme files, and  
help files. Most of the documentation for your server is on the ThinkServer  
Documentation DVD provided with your server. See the troubleshooting information  
in your system documentation for instructions for using the diagnostic programs.  
The troubleshooting information or the diagnostic programs might tell you that you  
need additional or updated device drivers or other software. Lenovo maintains  
pages on the World Wide Web where you can get the latest technical information  
and download device drivers and updates. To access these pages, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support and follow the instructions.  
Getting help and information from the World Wide Web  
On the World Wide Web, the Lenovo Web site has up-to-date information about  
Lenovo systems, optional devices, services, and support. For general information  
about Lenovo products or to purchase Lenovo products, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com. For support on Lenovo products, go to  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Calling for service  
During the warranty period, you can get help and information by telephone through  
the Customer Support Center.  
These services are available during the warranty period:  
v Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with  
determining a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the  
problem.  
v Hardware repair - If the problem is caused by hardware under warranty, trained  
service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service.  
v Engineering Change management - There might be changes that are required  
after a product has been sold. Lenovo or your reseller will make selected  
Engineering Changes (ECs) available that apply to your hardware.  
These items are not covered by the warranty:  
v Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or  
non-warranted Lenovo parts  
v Identification of software problem sources  
v Configuration of BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade  
v Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers  
v Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS)  
v Installation and maintenance of application programs  
Refer to the safety and warranty information that is provided with your computer for  
a complete explanation of warranty terms. You must retain your proof of purchase  
to obtain warranty service.  
For a list of service and support phone numbers for your country or region, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support and click Support phone list or refer to the safety  
and warranty information provided with your computer.  
Note: Phone numbers are subject to change without notice. If the number for your  
country or region is not provided, contact your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing  
representative.  
If possible, be at your computer when you call. Have the following information  
available:  
v Machine type and model  
v Serial numbers of our hardware products  
v Description of the problem  
v Exact working of any error messages  
v Hardware and software configuration information  
Using other services  
If you travel with a Lenovo notebook computer or relocate your computer to a  
country where your desktop, notebook, or server machine type is sold, your  
computer might be eligible for International Warranty Service, which automatically  
entitles you to obtain warranty service throughout the warranty period. Service will  
be performed by service providers authorized to perform warranty service.  
180 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Service methods and procedures vary by country, and some services might not be  
available in all countries. International Warranty Service is delivered through the  
method of service (such as depot, carry-in, or on-site service) that is provided in the  
servicing country. Service centers in certain countries might not be able to service  
all models of a particular machine type. In some countries, fees and restrictions  
might apply at the time of service.  
To determine whether your computer is eligible for International Warranty Service  
and to view a list of the countries where service is available, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support, click Warranty, and follow the instructions on the  
screen.  
For technical assistance with the installation of, or questions related to, Service  
Packs for your preinstalled Microsoft® Windows® product, refer to the Microsoft  
Product Support Services Web site at http://www.support.microsoft.com/directory/,  
or you can contact the Customer Support Center. Some fees might apply.  
Purchasing additional services  
During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional services, such as  
support for hardware, operating systems, and application programs; network setup  
and configuration; upgraded or extended hardware repair services; and custom  
installations. Service availability and service name might vary by country or region.  
For more information about these services, go to the Lenovo Web site at  
Lenovo product service  
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
182 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B. Notices  
Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document  
in all countries. Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the  
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to a Lenovo  
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo  
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,  
program, or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may  
be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the  
operation of any other product, program, or service.  
Lenovo may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter  
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any  
license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:  
Lenovo (United States), Inc.  
1009 Think Place - Building One  
Morrisville, NC 27560  
U.S.A.  
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing  
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF  
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow  
disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this  
statement may not apply to you.  
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.  
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be  
incorporated in new editions of the publication. Lenovo may make improvements  
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication  
at any time without notice.  
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or  
other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to  
persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change  
Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate  
as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights  
of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained  
in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in  
other operating environments may vary.  
Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it  
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.  
Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for  
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those  
Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this  
Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.  
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled  
environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may  
vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level  
systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on  
generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document  
should verify the applicable data for their specific environment.  
Trademarks  
The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries,  
or both:  
Lenovo  
Lenovo logo  
ThinkServer  
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation  
in the United States, other countries, or both:  
IBM®  
ServeRAID™  
Intel® and Intel Xeon® are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States,  
other countries, or both.  
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States, other countries, or both.  
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other  
countries, or both.  
Red Hat, the Red Hat “Shadow Man” logo, and all Red Hat-based trademarks and  
logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc., in the United States  
and other countries.  
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of  
others.  
Important notes  
Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other  
factors also affect application performance.  
CD or DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often  
less than the possible maximum.  
When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume,  
KB stands for 1024 bytes, MB stands for 1 048 576 bytes, and GB stands for  
1 073 741 824 bytes.  
When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands  
for 1 000 000 bytes, and GB stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user-accessible  
capacity can vary depending on operating environments.  
Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any  
standard hard disk drives and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest  
currently supported drives that are available from Lenovo.  
Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an  
optional memory module.  
184 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lenovo makes no representation or warranties regarding non-Lenovo products and  
services, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and  
fitness for a particular purpose. These products are offered and warranted solely by  
third parties.  
Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not include  
user manuals or all program functionality.  
Product recycling and disposal  
This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national  
regulations. Lenovo encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to  
responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a  
variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT  
products. Information on Lenovo product recycling offerings can be found on  
Lenovo’s Internet site at  
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment/recycling.  
Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la  
normativa nacional o local aplicable. Lenovo recomienda a los propietarios de  
equipos de tecnología de la información (TI) que reciclen responsablemente sus  
equipos cuando éstos ya no les sean útiles. Lenovo dispone de una serie de  
programas y servicios de devolución de productos, a fin de ayudar a los  
propietarios de equipos a reciclar sus productos de TI. Se puede encontrar  
información sobre las ofertas de reciclado de productos de Lenovo en el sitio web  
de Lenovo  
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment/recycling.  
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and  
Norway.  
This appliance is labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC  
concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive  
determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as  
applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various products  
to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end  
of life per this Directive.  
Remarque : Cette marque s’applique uniquement aux pays de l’Union Européenne  
et à la Norvège.  
Appendix B. Notices 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
L’etiquette du système respecte la Directive européenne 2002/96/EC en matière de  
Déchets des Equipements Electriques et Electroniques (DEEE), qui détermine les  
dispositions de retour et de recyclage applicables aux systèmes utilisés à travers  
l’Union européenne. Conformément à la directive, ladite étiquette précise que le  
produit sur lequel elle est apposée ne doit pas être jeté mais être récupéré en fin  
de vie.  
In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic  
equipment (EEE) is to be collected separately and to be reused, recycled, or  
recovered at end of life. Users of EEE with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the  
WEEE Directive, as shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted  
municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the  
return, recycling, and recovery of WEEE. Customer participation is important to  
minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to  
the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE. For proper collection and  
treatment, contact your local Lenovo representative.  
Particulate contamination  
Attention: Airborne particulates (including metal flakes or particles) and reactive  
gases acting alone or in combination with other environmental factors such as  
humidity or temperature might pose a risk to the server that is described in this  
document. Risks that are posed by the presence of excessive particulate levels or  
concentrations of harmful gases include damage that might cause the server to  
malfunction or cease functioning altogether. This specification sets forth limits for  
particulates and gases that are intended to avoid such damage. The limits must not  
be viewed or used as definitive limits, because numerous other factors, such as  
temperature or moisture content of the air, can influence the impact of particulates  
or environmental corrosives and gaseous contaminant transfer. In the absence of  
specific limits that are set forth in this document, you must implement practices that  
maintain particulate and gas levels that are consistent with the protection of human  
health and safety. If Lenovo determines that the levels of particulates or gases in  
your environment have caused damage to the server, Lenovo may condition  
provision of repair or replacement of servers or parts on implementation of  
appropriate remedial measures to mitigate such environmental contamination.  
Implementation of such remedial measures is a customer responsibility.  
Table 17. Limits for particulates and gases  
Contaminant  
Limits  
Particulate  
v The room air must be continuously filtered with 40% atmospheric dust  
spot efficiency (MERV 9) according to ASHRAE Standard 52.21.  
v Air that enters a data center must be filtered to 99.97% efficiency or  
greater, using high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters that meet  
MIL-STD-282.  
v The deliquescent relative humidity of the particulate contamination  
must be more than 60%2.  
v The room must be free of conductive contamination such as zinc  
whiskers.  
Gaseous  
v Copper: Class G1 as per ANSI/ISA 71.04-19853  
v Silver: Corrosion rate of less than 300 Å in 30 days  
186 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 17. Limits for particulates and gases (continued)  
Contaminant Limits  
1 ASHRAE 52.2-2008 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for  
Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. Atlanta: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and  
Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.  
2 The deliquescent relative humidity of particulate contamination is the relative humidity at  
which the dust absorbs enough water to become wet and promote ionic conduction.  
3 ANSI/ISA-71.04-1985. Environmental conditions for process measurement and control  
systems: Airborne contaminants. Instrument Society of America, Research Triangle Park,  
North Carolina, U.S.A.  
Compliance with Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of  
Hazardous Substances  
Meets requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the  
Use of Certain Hazardous Substances In Electrical and Electronic Equipment  
(EEE).  
Türkiye EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygunluk Beyanı  
Bu Lenovo ürünü, T.C. Çevre ve Orman Bakanlığı'nın  
“Elektrik ve Elektronik Eşyalarda Bazı Zararlı Maddelerin  
Kullanımının Sınırlandırılmasına Dair Yönetmelik (EEE)”  
direktiflerine uygundur.  
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.  
Recycling statements for Japan  
Appendix B. Notices 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Battery return program  
This product may contain a lithium or lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual  
or service manual for specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or  
disposed of properly. Recycling facilities may not be available in your area. For  
information on disposal or batteries outside the United States, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment or contact your local waste disposal  
facility.  
For Taiwan: Please recycle batteries.  
For the European Union:  
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU).  
Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European  
Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries  
and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and  
recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European  
Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to  
be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.  
Les batteries ou emballages pour batteries sont étiquetés conformément aux  
directives européennes 2006/66/EC, norme relative aux batteries et accumulateurs  
en usage et aux batteries et accumulateurs usés. Les directives déterminent la  
marche à suivre en vigueue dans l’Union Européenne pour le retour et le recyclage  
des batteries et accumulateurs usés. Cette étiquette est appliquée sur diverses  
188 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
batteries pour indiquer que la batterie ne doit pas être mise au rebut mais plutôt  
récupérée en fin de cycle de vie selon cette norme.  
In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators  
are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end  
of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal  
concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for cadmium). Users  
of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as  
unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers  
for the return, recycling, and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer  
participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and  
accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence  
of hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.  
For California:  
Perchlorate material - special handling may apply. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/  
hazardouswaste/perchlorate/.  
The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations  
Title 22, Division 4.5 Chapter 33. Best Management Practices for Perchlorate  
Materials. This product/part may include a lithium manganese dioxide battery which  
contains a perchlorate substance.  
German Ordinance for Work gloss statement  
The product is not suitable for use with visual display work place devices according  
to clause 2 of the German Ordinance for Work with Visual Display Units.  
Das Produkt ist nicht für den Einsatz an Bildschirmarbeitsplätzen im Sinne § 2 der  
Bildschirmarbeitsverordnung geeignet.  
Electronic emission notices  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the  
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,  
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause  
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the  
interference at his own expense.  
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to  
meet FCC emission limits. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television  
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by  
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or  
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
Appendix B. Notices 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du  
Canada.  
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement  
Notice to Customers  
This apparatus is approved under approval number NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect  
connection to public telecommunication systems in the United Kingdom.  
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council  
Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States  
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any  
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended  
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-Lenovo option cards  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A  
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN  
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial  
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed  
communication equipment.  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
Germany Class A compliance statement  
Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:  
Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen  
Verträglichkeit  
190 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG  
(früher 89/336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die  
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die  
Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.  
Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu  
installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der Lenovo  
empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo übernimmt keine Verantwortung  
für die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung  
der Lenovo verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern  
ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden.  
Deutschland:  
Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von  
Betriebsmittein  
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
von Betriebsmitteln” EMVG (früher “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische  
Verträglichkeit von Geräten”). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie  
2004/108/EG (früher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.  
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die  
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli  
2007 (früher Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten),  
bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (früher 89/336/EWG), für Geräte der  
Klasse A.  
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das  
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die  
Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo (Deutschland)  
GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart.  
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:  
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022  
Klasse A.  
Nach der EN 55022: “Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung  
kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom  
Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür  
aufzukommen.”  
Nach dem EMVG: “Geräte dürfen an Orten, für die sie nicht ausreichend entstört  
sind, nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesministers für Post und  
Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes für Post und Telekommunikation  
betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn keine elektromagnetischen  
Störungen zu erwarten sind.” (Auszug aus dem EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs. 4).  
Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren ist nach Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der  
entsprechenden Kostenverordnung (Amtsblatt 14/93) kostenpflichtig.  
Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in  
den Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.  
Appendix B. Notices 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement  
Taiwan Class A warning statement  
People’s Republic of China Class A warning statement  
Korea Class A warning statement  
192 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
CD drive  
A
adapter  
configuration programs  
connector  
PCI card  
ServeRAID-MR10is  
connectors  
controller  
cover  
cover, side  
creating  
CRUs, installing  
B
battery  
CRUs, removing  
bezel  
lower  
upper  
D
device, hypervisor flash  
diagnostic  
diagnostics  
C
cables  
DIMM  
DIMMs  
cabling  
diskette drive  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
diskette drive (continued)  
errors (continued)  
Ethernet  
drive  
controller  
drives  
bay 1, 2, or 3  
hot-swap SAS  
hot-swap SATA  
Simple-swap SATA  
F
fan  
DSA  
DVD  
DVD drive  
hard disk drive, assembly  
rear  
fan sink  
fan sink retention module  
fans  
E
EasyStartup  
formatting  
error codes and messages  
front USB connector assembly  
error symptoms  
front-panel assembly  
G
errors  
194 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
installing (continued)  
H
hard disk drive  
fan  
hard disk drives  
hard-disk drive  
hot-plug adapter.  
hot-plug devices  
power supply  
hot-swap drive  
backplane  
hot-swap drives, SAS or SATA  
hot-swap power supply  
hot-swap power supply cage  
hot-swap SAS drives  
hot-swap SATA drives  
hypervisor flash device  
internal drives  
I
IMM  
J
jumpers and switches  
installation order  
installing  
K
key, virtual media  
bezel  
L
LEDs  
Index 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LEDs (continued)  
LEDs and controls  
logs  
lower bezel  
P
PCI  
PCI adapter  
PCI card  
POST  
power  
M
memory  
memory module  
memory modules  
power supply  
hot-swap  
non-hot-swap  
messages  
power-on password  
problems  
microprocessor  
N
notices  
O
optional optical drive  
options  
order of installation  
R
RAID array  
196 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
remote presence feature  
SCSI  
removing  
serial  
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)  
backplane  
server  
fan  
server controls and indicator  
ServeRAID-MR10i  
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller  
ServeRAID-MR10is adapter  
power supply  
ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA controller  
Setup Utility  
simple-swap backplate  
simple-swap drives  
Simple-swap SATA drives  
S
safety information  
SAS or SATA hot-swap drives  
starting  
switches and jumpers  
system  
system board  
SAS/SATA controller  
SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane  
SATA simple-swap drives  
Index 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
system board (continued)  
virtual media key  
VRM  
W
Web interface  
Web site  
T
tape drive  
U
updating  
upper bezel  
USB  
USB, front connector assembly  
using  
V
video  
video controller, integrated  
198 ThinkServer TS200 Types 6522, 6523, 6524, 6525, 6526, 6528, 6529, and 6530: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printed in USA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Kustom Musical Instrument Amplifier KG100FX112 User Manual
Lanzar Car Audio Car Stereo System 200X4 User Manual
Lasko Fan 2002C User Manual
Leviton Speaker AESS5 User Manual
LG Electronics Stereo System MCD112B User Manual
Maytag Washer LAT5914 User Manual
McCulloch Lawn Mower MC2042YT 96042011500 User Manual
Melissa Blood Pressure Monitor 630 016 User Manual
Melissa Toaster 243 011 User Manual
Metra Electronics Automobile Accessories 99 8710 User Manual